Kenwood Car Satellite Radio System TS590SG User Manual
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
TS-590SG  
INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
© B5A-0180-00 (K, E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THANK YOU  
NOTICE TO THE USER  
One or more of the following statements may be  
applicable for this equipment.  
Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-590SG  
transceiver. It has been developed by a team of  
engineers determined to continue the tradition of  
excellence and innovation in KENWOOD transceivers.  
FCC WARNING  
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.  
Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful  
interference unless the modifications are expressly approved  
in the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to  
operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification  
is made.  
This transceiver features a Digital Signal Processing  
(DSP) unit to process IF and AF signals. By taking  
maximum advantage of DSP technology, the TS-  
590SG transceiver gives you enhanced interference  
reduction capabilities and improves the quality of  
audio. You will notice the differences when you  
fight QRM and QRN. As you learn how to use this  
transceiver, you will also find that KENWOOD is  
pursuing “user friendliness”. For example, each time  
you change the Menu No. in Menu mode, you will see  
scrolling messages on the display, telling you what  
you are selecting.  
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED  
BY THE FCC  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that the  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically  
sophisticated and some features may be new to you.  
Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the  
designers. Allow the manual to guide you through the  
learning process now, then act as a reference in the  
coming years.  
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
FEATURES  
•
•
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
•
All mode operation from HF to 50 MHz amateur  
radio band  
Consult the dealer for technical assistance.  
•
•
500 Hz/ 2.7 kHz roofing filter  
This device complies with Industry Canada license  
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions : (1) this device may not  
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
Superior C/N response by the DDS largely  
decreases the noise of the undesired signal.  
•
IF DSP through the adoption of 32-bit floating point  
DSP  
•
•
Digital Noise Blanker  
This product is designed for connection to an IT power  
distribution system.  
PC interface via a Universal Serial Bus port  
(B-type)  
•
•
•
•
•
Drive output/ RX Antenna output  
Direct band keys  
NOTIFICATION  
This equipment complies with the essential requirements of  
Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Built-in Antenna Tuner  
Morse Code Decoder  
The use of the warning symbol  
subject to restrictions of use in certain countries.  
means the equipment is  
100 W output power for SSB, CW, FSK, FM, and  
25 W output power for AM.  
This equipment requires a licence and is intended for use in  
the countries below.  
AT  
IT  
BE  
LI  
DK  
LU  
CZ  
BG  
FI  
FR  
NO  
HU  
HR  
DE  
PT  
LV  
GR  
ES  
LT  
IS  
IE  
CH  
PL  
NL  
EE  
RO  
SE  
MT  
GB  
SK  
CY  
SI  
ISO3166  
Information on Disposal of Old Electrical and Electronic Equipment  
and Batteries (applicable for countries that have adopted separate  
waste collection systems)  
Products and batteries with the symbol (crossed-out  
wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household waste.  
Old electrical and electronic equipment and batteries  
should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these  
items and their waste byproducts.  
Contact your local authority for details in locating a recycle  
facility nearest to you.  
Proper recycling and waste disposal will help conserve  
resources whilst preventing detrimental effects on our  
health and the environment.  
Firmware Copyrights  
The title to and ownership of copyrights for firmware embedded in  
KENWOOD product memories are reserved for JVC KENWOOD  
Corporation.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE STARTING  
Amateur radio regulations vary from country to  
country. Confirm your local amateur radio regulations  
and requirements before operating the transceiver.  
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES  
After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the  
items listed in the table below. We recommend you  
keep the box and packing materials in case you need  
to repack the transceiver in the future.  
Depending on the size and type of vehicle, the  
maximum transmission output power for the mobile  
operation will vary. The maximum transmission output  
power is usually specified by the car manufacturer  
to avoid interference with other electric devices used  
in the vehicle. Consult your car manufacturer and  
amateur radio equipment dealer for the requirements  
and installation.  
Quantity  
Accessory  
Microphone  
Comment  
K-type E-type  
1
1
1
1
DC power cable  
25 A; for DC  
power cable  
Fuse  
1
1
4 A; for an  
external  
antenna tuner  
MARKET CODES  
K-type: The Americas  
Fuse  
1
1
7-pin (For  
REMOTE  
connector)  
E-type: Europe  
DIN plug  
DIN plug  
1
1
1
1
The market code is shown on the carton box.  
Refer to the specifications {page 86} for information on  
the available operating frequencies.  
13-pin  
(For ACC2  
connector)  
Screw set  
For bracket  
For bracket  
English  
French  
1
4
1
1
–
–
–
–
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED  
The writing conventions described below have  
been followed to simplify instructions and avoid  
unnecessary repetition.  
Plastic spacer  
Spanish  
Italian  
Instruction  
Press [KEY].  
Action  
Instruction Manual  
Press and release KEY.  
German  
Dutch  
Press and release KEY on  
the microphone.  
Press Mic [KEY].  
Schematic  
diagram  
Press and hold KEY down  
2
1
–
1
Press and hold [KEY]. for a moment, then release  
KEY.  
Warranty Card  
Press and hold KEY down  
until instructed to release  
KEY.  
Hold [KEY].  
With the transceiver power  
OFF, press and hold KEY,  
then switch the transceiver  
power ON by pressing [ ].  
Press [KEY] + [ ].  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
•
Locate the transceiver away from heat sources  
such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other devices  
that produce substantial amounts of heat.  
PRECAUTIONS  
Please observe the following precautions to prevent  
fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:  
Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint  
thinner, gasoline, or benzene to clean the cabinet  
of the transceiver. Use only a clean cloth with  
warm water or a mild detergent.  
•
Connect the transceiver only to a power source  
as described in this manual or as marked on the  
transceiver itself.  
•
Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power  
cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched  
by items placed near or against the cables.  
Pay particular attention to locations near AC  
receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to  
the transceiver.  
•
•
Disconnect the input power cable from the power  
source when the transceiver is not used for long  
periods of time.  
Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do  
accessory installations described in this manual or  
accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions  
carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar  
with this type of work, seek assistance from an  
experienced individual, or have a professional  
technician do the task.  
•
Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the  
transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal  
objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into  
the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in  
serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to  
insert any objects into the transceiver.  
•
Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the  
following cases:  
•
•
Do not attempt to defeat methods used for  
grounding and electrical polarization in the  
transceiver, particularly involving the power input  
cable.  
a) The power supply or plug is damaged.  
b) Objects have fallen into or liquid has spilled into  
the transceiver.  
c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.  
Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this  
transceiver using approved methods. Grounding  
helps protect against voltage surges caused by  
lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up  
of static charge.  
d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or  
performance has seriously degraded.  
e) The transceiver has been dropped or the  
enclosure damaged.  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
•
Do not attempt to perform any kind of configuration  
or menu setup while driving.  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
•
•
Do not wear headphones while driving.  
WIRE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
Install the transceiver in a safe and convenient  
position inside your vehicle so as not to subject  
yourself to danger while driving. Consult your car  
dealer for the transceiver installation to ensure  
safety.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
GROUNDING  
CONDUCTORS  
•
•
HF/ 50 MHz mobile antennas are larger and  
heavier than VHF/ UHF antennas. Therefore, use  
a strong and rigid mount to safely and securely  
install the HF/ 50 MHz mobile antenna.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
ELECTRIC SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
POWER SERVICE  
GROUNDING ELECTRODE  
SYSTEM  
Do not put the plastic bag used for packing of this  
equipment on the place which reaches a small  
child's hand. It will become a cause of suffocation if  
it wears flatly.  
•
•
Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor  
antenna from power lines is one and one-half  
times the vertical height of the associated antenna  
support structure. This distance allows adequate  
clearance from the power lines if the support  
structure fails for any reason.  
Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its  
ventilation. Do not place books or other equipment  
on the transceiver that may impede the free  
movement of air. Allow a minimum of 10 cm  
(4 inches) between the rear of the transceiver and  
the wall or operating desk shelf.  
•
•
Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of  
moisture. For example, avoid use near a bathtub,  
sink, swimming pool, or in a damp basement or  
attic.  
The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is  
often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the  
power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact  
a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for  
advice.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
THANK YOU.........................................................................i  
FEATURES ...........................................................................i  
NOTICE TO THE USER.........................................................i  
BEFORE STARTING............................................................. ii  
MARKET CODES................................................................. ii  
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED................................ ii  
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES .................................................. ii  
PRECAUTIONS .................................................................. iii  
CONTENTS ........................................................................ iv  
CARRIER LEVEL............................................................23  
CHAPTER 6 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ......................................24  
DIRECTLY ENTERING THE FREQUENCY SPLIT  
SPECIFIED BY A DXer ...................................................24  
TURN THE TUNING CONTROL TO SEARCH FOR THE  
TRANSMIT FREQUENCY ...............................................24  
TF-SET (TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY SET).................24  
SHIFTABLE RX FREQUENCY DURING SPLIT  
TRANSMISSION............................................................25  
FM REPEATER OPERATION ..............................................25  
TRANSMITTING A TONE ...............................................26  
Activating the Tone Function....................................26  
Selecting a Tone Frequency .....................................26  
TONE FREQUENCY ID SCAN .........................................26  
FM CTCSS OPERATION ....................................................27  
CTCSS FREQUENCY ID SCAN .......................................27  
CROSS TONE ................................................................28  
CHAPTER 1  
INSTALLATION  
ANTENNA CONNECTION.....................................................1  
GROUND CONNECTION......................................................1  
LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................................1  
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ....................................1  
UTILIZING THE BAIL...........................................................2  
REPLACING FUSES ...........................................................2  
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS..............................................2  
FRONT PANEL.................................................................2  
Headphones (PHONES) .............................................2  
Microphone (MIC) .....................................................2  
REAR PANEL...................................................................2  
External Speaker (EXT.SP).........................................2  
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)................................2  
CHAPTER 7  
COMMUNICATING AIDS  
RECEPTION ......................................................................29  
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY....................................29  
Direct Frequency Entry ............................................29  
Frequency Entry History ..........................................29  
Using the MHz key...................................................29  
Quick QSY ...............................................................29  
Fine Tuning ..............................................................30  
Tuning Control Adjustment Rate..............................30  
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)...........................30  
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)........................30  
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)..............................30  
AGC Time Constant Adjustment...............................30  
TRANSMISSION............................................................31  
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMISSION) ...................31  
Microphone Input Level...........................................31  
Delay Time...............................................................31  
Anti-VOX Adjustment...............................................31  
Data VOX .................................................................31  
Data VOX Delay Time...............................................32  
USB/ ACC2 VOX Gain...............................................32  
SPEECH PROCESSOR...................................................32  
Speech Processor Effect..........................................32  
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING).....................32  
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMISSION SIGNAL  
CHAPTER 2  
GETTING ACQUAINTED  
FRONT PANEL ....................................................................4  
LCD DISPLAY .....................................................................7  
REAR PANEL ......................................................................9  
MICROPHONE ....................................................................9  
CHAPTER 3  
OPERATING BASICS  
SWITCHING POWER ON/ OFF ..........................................10  
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME ...............................................10  
AF (AUDIO FREQUENCY) GAIN .....................................10  
RF (RADIO FREQUENCY) GAIN.....................................10  
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B............................................10  
SELECTING A BAND .........................................................11  
SELECTING A MODE.........................................................11  
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH..............................................12  
TUNING A FREQUENCY ....................................................12  
MULTI-FUNCTION METER................................................12  
TRANSMITTING................................................................13  
SELECTING TRANSMISSION POWER...........................13  
MICROPHONE GAIN......................................................13  
CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................33  
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM)................................33  
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB-DATA) .............................33  
TX Equalizer (SSB/ SSB-DATA / FM/ FM-DATA/ AM/  
AM-DATA)................................................................33  
TRANSMIT INHIBIT.......................................................33  
BUSY LOCKOUT............................................................33  
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING.........33  
CW BREAK-IN...................................................................34  
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN.................34  
ELECTRONIC KEYER ........................................................34  
ELECTRONIC KEYER MODE..........................................34  
CHANGING KEYING SPEED...........................................34  
Invalid Break-In Operation.......................................34  
RISE TIME OF CW.........................................................35  
AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................................35  
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio...................................35  
BUG KEY FUNCTION .....................................................35  
CHAPTER 4  
MENU SETUP  
WHAT IS A MENU?...........................................................14  
MENU A/ MENU B.............................................................14  
MENU ACCESS .................................................................14  
QUICK MENU....................................................................14  
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU..............................14  
USING THE QUICK MENU .............................................14  
MENU CONFIGURATION...................................................15  
CHAPTER 5  
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
SSB TRANSMISSION........................................................21  
AM TRANSMISSION.........................................................21  
FM TRANSMISSION .........................................................22  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM.......................................22  
CW TRANSMISSION.........................................................22  
AUTO ZERO-BEAT .........................................................23  
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY .........................23  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
CW MESSAGE MEMORY...............................................35  
Storing CW Messages .............................................35  
Checking CW Messages without Transmitting.........36  
Transmitting CW Messages .....................................36  
Erasing a CW Message............................................36  
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time ..............36  
Changing the CW Sidetone Volume .........................36  
Insert Keying ...........................................................36  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW ................................37  
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE..........................................37  
MIC UP/ DWN KEY PADDLE MODE...............................37  
SWAP DOT AND DASH PADDLE POSITIONS ................37  
MORSE CODE DECODER..................................................38  
THRESHOLD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT...............................38  
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES...........................47  
QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER.............................47  
ERASING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ........................47  
CHAPTER 11  
SCAN  
NORMAL SCAN ................................................................48  
VFO SCAN .....................................................................48  
PROGRAM SCAN ..........................................................48  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED........................49  
SCAN HOLD ..................................................................50  
MEMORY SCAN................................................................50  
SCAN RESUME..............................................................50  
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................................50  
GROUP SCAN................................................................51  
Memory Group ........................................................51  
Scan Group Select...................................................51  
Performing Group Scan...........................................51  
QUICK MEMORY SCAN ....................................................51  
CHAPTER 8  
DATA COMMUNICATIONS  
RADIO TELETYPE (RTTY).................................................39  
PHASE-SHIFT KEYING 31 BAUD (PSK31) ........................39  
CHAPTER 9  
REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
CHAPTER 12  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
DSP FILTERS....................................................................40  
CHANGING THE DSP FILTER BANDWIDTH...................40  
SSB/ FM/ AM Mode (High cut/Low cut)...................40  
CW/ FSK Mode (Width/Shift)...................................40  
SSB Data Mode (Width/Shift)..................................40  
IF Filter A and B .......................................................40  
Filter control in SSB/ SSB-DATA mode  
(High/Low and Width/Shift).....................................41  
AUTO NOTCH FILTER (SSB)..........................................41  
Auto Notch Tracking Speed......................................41  
MANUAL NOTCH FILTER (SSB/ CW/ FSK) ....................41  
Notch Filter Bandwidth ............................................41  
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM)..............................................41  
NOISE REDUCTION (ALL MODES)................................41  
Setting the NR1 Level Adjustment...........................42  
Setting the NR2 Time Constant................................42  
NOISE BLANKER ..............................................................42  
PRE-AMPLIFIER ...............................................................42  
ATTENUATOR ...................................................................42  
CW REVERSE (RECEPTION).............................................42  
ANTENNAS .......................................................................52  
ANT 1/ ANT 2 ................................................................52  
RX ANT..........................................................................52  
DRV...............................................................................52  
Selecting the DRV Connector Function....................52  
APO (Auto Power OFF) .....................................................52  
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.........................................52  
PRESETTING.................................................................53  
AUTO MODE .....................................................................53  
BEEP FUNCTION...............................................................54  
DISPLAY...........................................................................55  
BRIGHTNESS ................................................................55  
BACKLIGHT COLOR ......................................................55  
PANEL KEY DOUBLE FUNCTION RESPONSE TIME ..........55  
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL.........................................55  
LOCK FUNCTIONS ............................................................56  
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION......................................56  
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS.................................56  
TRANSCEIVER FRONT PANEL.......................................56  
MICROPHONE KEYS .....................................................56  
DSP RX EQUALIZER.........................................................57  
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO...................................57  
RX MONITOR ................................................................58  
TIME-OUT TIMER .............................................................58  
TRANSVERTER.................................................................58  
FREQUENCY DISPLAY...................................................58  
TRANSMISSION OUTPUT POWER................................58  
TX MONITOR....................................................................58  
TX POWER........................................................................58  
TX TUNE ...........................................................................59  
ADJUSTING THE TRANSMIT OUTPUT POWER  
CHAPTER 10  
MEMORY FEATURES  
MEMORY CHANNELS.......................................................43  
STORING DATA IN MEMORY ........................................43  
Simplex Channels....................................................43  
Split-Frequency Channels........................................43  
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL ..................................44  
Memory Recall ........................................................44  
Memory Scroll.........................................................44  
Temporary Frequency Changes................................44  
MEMORY TRANSFER....................................................44  
Memory ➡ VFO Transfer .........................................44  
Channel ➡ Channel Transfer....................................44  
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES...................................45  
Confirming Start/ End Frequencies..........................46  
Programmable VFO .................................................46  
MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT.....................................46  
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS....................................46  
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME...........................................46  
QUICK MEMORY...............................................................46  
NUMBER OF QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ...................47  
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY..................................47  
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ....................47  
FOR TX TUNE................................................................59  
QUICK DATA TRANSFER...................................................59  
SETTING UP..................................................................59  
Equipment Needed...................................................59  
Connections.............................................................59  
USING QUICK TRANSFER .............................................60  
Transferring Data.....................................................60  
Receiving Data.........................................................60  
COMPUTER CONTROL .....................................................60  
SETTING UP..................................................................60  
Equipment Needed...................................................60  
Connections.............................................................60  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS.................................60  
SERVICE NOTE..............................................................79  
CLEANING.....................................................................79  
FIRMWARE UPDATING.....................................................79  
ABOUT FIRMWARE UPDATING.....................................79  
VERIFYING THE FIRMWARE VERSION .........................79  
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................80  
MICROPROCESSOR RESET..............................................83  
INITIAL SETTINGS ........................................................83  
VFO RESET....................................................................83  
FULL RESET..................................................................83  
OPERATION NOTICES.......................................................84  
DC POWER SUPPLY......................................................84  
INTERNAL COOLING FAN..............................................84  
INTERNAL BEATS..........................................................84  
AGC...............................................................................84  
60 m BAND OPERATION ...............................................84  
EXTERNAL AUDIO SETTINGS .......................................61  
Selecting a Data Transmission Line .........................61  
Audio Level Settings................................................61  
SELECTING THE AUDIO SOURCE FOR TRANSMISSION  
IN DATA MODE..............................................................61  
CHANGING THE SIGNAL FOR THE COM TERMINAL.....61  
CONTROLLING THE TS-590SG FROM A PC..................61  
REMOTELY CONTROLLING THE TS-590SG ON THE  
NETWORK.....................................................................61  
OPTIONAL VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE UNIT .........62  
RECORDING MESSAGES ..............................................62  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK ...................................................62  
Checking Messages.................................................62  
Sending Messages...................................................62  
Erasing a Recorded Message...................................63  
Changing Inter-message Interval Time ....................63  
Changing Message Playback Volume ......................63  
CONSTANT RECORDING...............................................63  
VOICE GUIDE ................................................................63  
Voice Guide Announcement Volume .......................66  
Voice Guide Announcement Speed .........................66  
Voice Guide Announcement Language ...................66  
EMERGENCY CALL (K TYPE ONLY)..................................66  
CROSSBAND REPEATER .................................................66  
OPERATION...................................................................66  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE..............................................67  
SKY COMMAND SYSTEM II..............................................67  
SKY COMMAND SYSTEM II DIAGRAM .........................67  
PREPARATION ..............................................................68  
STARTING SKY COMMAND SYSTEM II OPERATION ....68  
POWER ON MESSAGE......................................................68  
CHAPTER 16  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES................................................85  
CHAPTER 17 SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................86  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
CHAPTER 13  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS..............................................69  
COM CONNECTOR ........................................................69  
ACC2 CONNECTOR........................................................69  
REMOTE CONNECTOR ..................................................70  
EXT.AT CONNECTOR (FOR AT-300)...............................70  
MIC CONNECTOR..........................................................70  
CONNECTING TO DATA COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT..71  
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER....................................71  
CONNECTING TO A TNC................................................72  
CONNECTING TO RTTY EQUIPMENT (FSK) ..................72  
CONNECTION TO THE LINEAR AMPLIFIER ......................73  
CONNECTION TO THE TL-922.......................................73  
CONNECTING A TYPICAL LINEAR AMPLIFIER..............73  
ANTENNA TUNER .............................................................74  
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER............................................74  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE..............................................75  
CROSSBAND REPEATER ..................................................75  
CHAPTER 14  
INSTALLING OPTIONS  
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE.......................................76  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE UNIT ...........................76  
SO-3 TCXO .......................................................................77  
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION .........................77  
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET ..............................................78  
PRECAUTIONS..............................................................78  
CHAPTER 15  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................79  
SERVICE........................................................................79  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 INSTALLATION  
ANTENNA CONNECTION  
LIGHTNING PROTECTION  
An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed  
line, and ground. The transceiver can give excellent  
results if the antenna system and its installation are  
given careful attention. Use a properly adjusted 50  
antenna of good quality, a high-quality 50 coaxial  
cable, and top-quality connectors. All connections  
must be clean and tight.  
Even in areas where lightning storms are less  
common, there is always a chance that a storm will  
occur each year. Consider carefully how to protect  
your equipment and home from lightning. The  
installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there  
is more that you can do. For example, terminate  
your antenna system transmission lines at an entry  
panel that you install outside your home. Ground this  
entry panel to a good outside ground, then connect  
the appropriate feed lines between the entry panel  
and your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs,  
disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will  
ensure additional protection.  
After making the connections, match the impedance  
of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is  
1.5:1 or less. High SWR will cause the transmit output  
to drop and may lead to radio frequency interference  
with consumer products such as stereo receivers  
and televisions. You may even cause interference  
with your own transceiver. Reports that your signal is  
distorted could indicate that your antenna system is  
not efficiently radiating your transceiver’s power.  
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION  
In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate  
13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased  
separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver  
to an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to  
connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply.  
Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires.  
The current capacity of the power supply must be  
20.5 A peak or more.  
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed  
line to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you  
are using two HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the  
secondary antenna to ANT 2. Refer to page 9 for the  
location of the antenna connectors.  
The LF band is outputted only from the DRV terminal.  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other  
matched load may damage the transceiver. Always connect  
the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.  
First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC  
power supply; the red lead to the positive terminal and  
the black lead to the negative terminal. Next, connect  
the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC power  
connector.  
All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester  
to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and transceiver  
damage.  
The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when the  
SWR is greater than 1.5:1; however, do not rely on protection  
to compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system.  
•
Press the connectors firmly until the locking tab  
clicks.  
Note:  
◆
Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver,  
be sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver.  
GROUND CONNECTION  
◆
Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you  
make all connections.  
At a minimum, a good DC ground is required to  
prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior  
communications, a good RF ground is required  
against which the antenna system can operate. Both  
of these conditions can be met by providing a good  
earth ground for your station. Bury one or more  
ground rods or a large copper plate under the ground,  
then connect this to the transceiver GND terminal.  
Use heavy gauge wire or a copper strap, cut as short  
as possible, for this connection. Do not use a gas  
pipe, an electrical conduit, or a plastic water pipe as a  
ground.  
Fuse (25 A)  
−
Black ( )  
Red (+)  
DC Power supply  
(20.5 A or more)  
TS-590SG  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 INSTALLATION  
UTILIZING THE BAIL  
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS  
FRONT PANEL  
This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you  
can angle the transceiver. The bail is located on the  
bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the  
limit as shown.  
■ Headphones (PHONES)  
Connect monaural or stereo headphones with a  
4 to 32 (normal 8 ) impedance. This jack  
accepts a 6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor  
(mono) or 3-conductor (stereo) plug. After  
connecting the headphones, you will hear no  
sound from the internal (or optional external)  
Speaker/Microphone (MIC).  
Note: Using a high impedance headphone set causes the  
volume to be louder.  
■ Microphone (MIC)  
Connect a microphone with a 250 to 600   
impedance. Fully insert the connector, then  
screw the retaining ring clockwise until secure.  
Compatible microphones include the MC-43S,  
MC-47, MC-52DM, MC-60A, MC-80, MC-85, and  
MC-90.  
Note: Do not use the MC-44, MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E,  
MC-45DM, MC-45DME, or MC-53DM microphones.  
REPLACING FUSES  
The following fuses are used in the TS-590SG  
transceiver. If a fuse blows, determine the cause  
then correct the problem. Only after the problem  
has been resolved, replace the blown fuse with a  
new one with the specified ratings. If newly installed  
fuses continue to blow, disconnect the power plug and  
contact a KENWOOD service center or your dealer for  
assistance.  
REAR PANEL  
■ External Speaker (EXT.SP)  
On the rear panel of the transceiver, there is an  
external speaker jack. If an external speaker is  
connected to EXP.SP, the transceiver internal  
speaker will mute. Use only external speakers with  
an impedance of 4 to 8 (8 nominal). This jack  
accepts only 3.5 mm (1/8") diameter, 2-conductor  
(mono) plugs.  
Fuse Location  
TS-590SG Transceiver  
Supplied DC power cable  
Fuse Current Rating  
4 A  
(for external  
antenna tuner)  
25 A  
Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio  
output of this jack could damage your hearing.  
■ Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)  
Fuse (4 A)  
For CW operation while using the internal  
electronic keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the  
PADDLE jack.  
For CW operation without using the internal  
electronic keyer, connect a straight key,  
semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer,  
or the CW keyed output from a Multi mode  
Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY jack.  
Fuse (25 A)  
Fuse (25 A)  
The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a 6.3 mm  
(1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm (1/8")  
2-conductor plug, respectively. External electronic  
keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be  
compatible with this transceiver. Use a shielded  
cable between the key and the transceiver.  
Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic  
keyer, you may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle  
and another type of keyer unless you want to use a  
PC-based keyer for CW. Read the “ELECTRONIC KEYER”  
section {page 34} to become familiar with the internal keyer.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION 1  
Headphones  
Front Panel  
GND (STBY)  
GND (MIC)  
NC  
MIC  
PTT  
DOWN  
UP  
8 V (10 mA max)  
MIC connector (Front view)  
External speaker  
Microphone  
Rear Panel  
•
Paddle  
•
•
•
•
Straight key  
Bug key  
Electronic keyer  
PC keyer output  
Note: Do not use a cable exceeding 3 m (9.8 feet) with the  
following connectors:  
PHONES jack  
EXT. SP jack  
KEY jack  
MIC connector  
COM connector  
ACC 2 connector REMOTE connector  
PADDLE jack  
DRV connector  
USB connector  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
FRONT PANEL  
A
G
H
C
D
E
F
B
—— A ——  
—— C ——  
[ ]  
[METER (DRV)]  
Press and hold to switch the transceiver power ON  
and OFF {page 10}.  
Press to switch the meter type {page 12}. Press and  
hold to select the Drive output or Antenna output {page  
52}.  
[PF A]  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 56}.  
[PF B]  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 56}.  
[ATT (RX ANT)]  
Press to turn the receiver attenuator ON or OFF  
{page 42}. Press and hold to enable or disable the  
RX-ANT terminal {page 52}.  
[MIC (CAR)]  
Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 13}. While  
the Speech Processor function is ON, press to adjust  
the Speech Processor output level {page 32}. Press  
and hold to adjust the carrier level {page 23}.  
[PRE (ANT 1/2)]  
Press to turn the pre-amplifier ON or OFF {page 42}.  
Press and hold to select either ANT 1 or ANT 2  
{page 52}.  
[PWR (TX MONI)]  
Press to adjust the transmission output power  
{pages 13, 58}. Press and hold to turn the  
transmission signal monitor function ON or OFF  
{page 58}.  
[VOX (LEV)]  
In voice mode, press to turn the VOX (Voice-Operated  
Transmit) function ON or OFF {page 31}. In CW  
mode, press to turn the Break-in function ON or OFF  
{page 34}. Press and hold to adjust the microphone  
input gain for VOX operation.  
[KEY (DELAY)]  
Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed  
{page 34}. Press and hold to adjust the VOX delay  
time for voice mode {page 31} or Break-in time (Full  
Break-in/ Semi Break-in time) for CW mode.  
[PROC (LEV)]  
Press to turn the Speech Processor ON or OFF  
{page 32}. Press and hold to adjust the Speech  
Processor input level.  
[GENE]  
Press to select the general coverage band memory  
{page 11}.  
[SEND]  
Press to turn transmission ON or OFF.  
[1.8 (1)]  
Press to select the 1.8 MHz band memory {page 11}  
or enter keypad number 1.  
[AT (TUNE)]  
Press to turn the internal antenna tuner ON or  
OFF {page 52}. Press and hold to start tuning the  
automatic antenna tuner.  
[3.5 (2)]  
Press to select the 3.5 MHz band memory {page 11}  
or enter keypad number 2.  
—— B ——  
[7 (3)]  
PHONES jack  
Press to select the 7 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 3.  
Mate with a 6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor  
(mono) or 3-conductor (stereo) plug for connecting a  
set of headphones {page 2}.  
[10 (4)]  
Press to select the 10 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 4.  
MIC connector  
Connect a microphone to this connector {page 2}.  
[14 (5)]  
Press to select the 14 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 5.  
[18 (6)]  
Press to select the 18 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 6.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING ACQUAINTED 2  
—— F ——  
[21 (7)]  
Press to select the 21 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 7.  
[IF FIL]  
Press to toggle between IF Filter A and IF Filter B  
{page 40}. You can adjust the filter bandwidth using  
the LO/WIDTH and HI/SHIFT controls. Press and  
hold [IF FIL] to momentarily display each setting value  
of the current DSP filter DSP filter bandwidth {page  
40}.  
[24 (8)]  
Press to select the 24 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 8.  
[28 (9)]  
Press to select the 28 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 9.  
[NB (LEV)]  
Press to cycle through Noise Blanker 1, Noise Blanker  
2, and OFF. Press and hold to adjust the Noise  
Blanker level {page 42}.  
[50 (0)]  
Press to select the 50 MHz band memory {page 11} or  
enter keypad number 0.  
[NR (LEV)]  
[CLR]  
Press to cycle through the DSP Noise Reduction  
types: NR1, NR2, or OFF {page 41}. When the Noise  
Reduction function is turned ON, press and hold  
to change the parameters of the Noise Reduction  
function {page 42}.  
Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.  
Press and hold to clear a memory channel {page 46}.  
[ENT]  
Press to enter your desired frequency using the  
10-key keypad {page 29}.  
[BC (A.NOTCH)]  
Press to select the DSP Beat Cancel function, BC1  
(Beat Cancel 1), BC2 (Beat Cancel 2) or OFF  
{page 41}. Press and hold to toggle the Auto  
Notch Filter ON and OFF {page 41}.  
—— D ——  
[LSB/USB]  
Press to select LSB or USB mode {page 11}.  
[NOTCH (WIDE)]  
[CW/FSK (REV)]  
Press to toggle the IF Notch Filter ON or OFF  
{page 41}. Press and hold to set up the IF Notch  
bandwidth {page 41}.  
Press to select CW or FSK mode {page 11}. Press  
and hold to select a sideband (CW/ CW-R or FSK/  
FSK-R).  
[SPLIT]  
[FM/AM (FM-N)]  
Press to select FM or AM mode {page 11}. Press and  
hold to select Narrow FM mode.  
Press to enter split-frequency operation, allowing  
you to use different transmission and reception  
frequencies {page 24}. Press and hold to enter the  
Split RX frequency setup mode.  
[DATA]  
Press to select a Data mode (LSB/ LSB-DATA, USB/  
USB-DATA, FM/ FM-DATA, or AM-DATA) {page 11}.  
In CW mode, Press to toggle the Morse Code  
Decoder ON and OFF. Press and hold to enter the  
threshold level adjustment mode for Morse Code  
Decoder {page 38}.  
[TF-SET]  
During split-frequency operation, press to monitor or  
change your transmit frequency {page 24}.  
[A/B (A=B)]  
Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 10}.  
Press and hold to duplicate the data in the current  
VFO to the other VFO {page 25}. While in Menu  
mode, press to select Menu A or Menu B. While in  
Program Memory Channel mode, press to recall the  
start or end frequency.  
[FINE (F.LOCK)]  
Press to activate the Fine tuning function to allow  
more precise tuning {page 30}. Press and hold to  
activate the Frequency Lock function {page 56}.  
—— E ——  
Central (Tuning) control  
[M/V]  
Press to toggle between Memory and VFO modes.  
Turn to select the desired frequency {page 12}. Use  
the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.  
Slide the lever underneath the Tuning control to the  
left or right to adjust the torque level of the control.  
Left makes the control light and right makes it heavy.  
[M.IN]  
Press to enter Memory Scroll mode and to store data  
to a Memory channel {page 43}.  
[M>V]  
Press to transfer the current Memory Channel  
contents to the VFO.  
light  
[Q-M.IN]  
heavy  
Press to store data to the Quick Memory {page 46}.  
TX-RX LED  
[Q-MR]  
Lights red while transmitting and green when the  
squelch opens while receiving.  
Press to recall data from the Quick Memory {page 47},  
while in VFO mode. Press to enter Memory Name  
Edit mode, while in Memory Channel mode {page 46}.  
[MHz]  
Press to turn the MHz Up/ Down function ON or OFF.  
The MHz digit increases or decreases when you turn  
the MULTI/CH control. In Menu mode, press to turn  
the Quick Menu ON or OFF {page 14}.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
A
B
G
H
C
D
E
F
[XIT]  
[SCAN (SG.SEL)]  
Press to turn the XIT (Transmit Incremental Tuning)  
function ON or OFF {page 32}.  
Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 48}.  
Press and hold to select a Scan group {page 51}.  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 56}.  
[MENU]  
Press to enter Menu mode {page 14}.  
[CL]  
[CH1 (REC)]  
Press to clear the RIT/ XIT frequency to zero  
{pages 30, 32}.  
Press to play back a CW {page 36} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 62}. Press and hold to  
record a CW {page 35} or voice message (requires  
VGS-1 option) {page 62}.  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 56}.  
[CH2 (REC)]  
RIT/ XIT control  
Press to play back a CW {page 36} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 62}. Press and hold to  
record a CW {page 35} or voice message (requires  
VGS-1 option) {page 62}.  
When the RIT/ XIT function is ON, turn to adjust  
the offset frequency. The RIT/ XIT offset frequency  
appears on the sub-display {pages 30, 32}. While  
scanning, turn to adjust the scan speed.  
[CH3 (REC)]  
—— H ——  
Press to play back a CW {page 36} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 62}. Press and hold to  
record a CW {page 35} or voice message (requires  
VGS-1 option) {page 62}.  
SQL control  
Turn to select the desired squelch level {page 12}.  
NOTCH control  
Turn to select the desired Notch frequency {page 41}.  
[RX/4 (REC)]  
Press to play back a CW {page 36} or voice message  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 62}, or the constantly  
recorded signal (requires VGS-1 option) {page 63}.  
Press and hold to activate the constant recorder  
(requires VGS-1 option) {page 63}.  
MULTI/CH control  
In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency  
up or down {page 29}. In Memory Channel mode,  
rotate to select a Memory Channel {page 43}.  
Also, used for selecting Menu numbers when  
accessing the Menu mode {page 14} and for various  
configurations. The MULTI/CH LED lights when the  
MULTI/CH control is not being used to adjust the step  
frequency.  
—— G ——  
[AGC/T (SEL)]  
Press to toggle the fast or slow response time for  
the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) {page 30}. In FM  
mode, press to cycle through the Tone settings: Tone,  
CTCSS, CTCSSx, or OFF {page 26}. When Tone is  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 56}.  
activated in FM mode, press and hold to select a Tone  
frequency {page 26}. When CTCSS is activated in FM  
mode, press and hold to select a CTCSS frequency  
{page 27}.  
HI/SHIFT control  
Rotate to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth (high-cut) or  
to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth (filter band shift)  
{page 40}.  
[CW T. (AGC OFF)]  
Press to start CW auto tuning {page 23}. Press and  
hold to turn AGC OFF {page 30}.  
LO/WIDTH control  
Rotate to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth (high-cut or  
shift) {page 40}.  
[RIT]  
AF control  
Press to turn the RIT (Receive Incremental Tuning)  
function ON or OFF {page 30}.  
Turn to adjust the AF gain level {page 10}.  
RF control  
You can assign a function to this Programmable  
Function key {page 56}.  
Turn to adjust the RF gain level {page 10}.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING ACQUAINTED 2  
LCD DISPLAY  
A
E
B
C
D
F
—— A ——  
Appears when the Noise Blanker 1 or 2 is ON  
{page 42}.  
While receiving, the meter serves as an S-meter to  
measure and display the received signal strength.  
While transmitting, it serves as a power meter plus an  
ALC meter, an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor  
compression meter. While adjusting the IF filter  
bandwidth, the meter displays an adjustment state  
{page 12}.  
“
” (fast) or “  
” (slow) appears when the  
Automatic Gain Control function is ON. “  
appears when the AGC is OFF {page 30}.  
”
Appears when IF filter A is selected {page 40}.  
Appears when IF filter B is selected {page 40}.  
—— B ——  
—— D ——  
Appears when the Auto Mode function is ON and  
while in Auto Mode frequency setup {page 53}.  
“
” appears when manual notch is set to Normal.  
“
“
” appears when Manual Notch is set to Wide.  
” appears when Auto Notch is selected {page  
Displays the operating mode (USB, LSB, FM, AM,  
CW, CWR, FSK, or FSR) {page 11}.  
41}.  
Appears when the Fine Tuning function is ON {page  
30}.  
Appears while in Menu mode {page 14}.  
Appears while in Memory Scroll mode {page 44}.  
Appears when the MHz Step function is ON {page 29}.  
Also appears when the Quick Menu function is ON  
{page 14}.  
Appears while in Memory Channel mode or Memory  
Scroll mode {page 44}.  
“
” or “  
” appears, depending on whether  
In normal operating mode and various configuration  
modes, it displays the Memory Channel number,  
Quick Memory number, and entry log number. In  
Menu mode, it displays the Menu No.  
DSP Noise Reduction 1 or Noise Reduction 2 is  
selected {page 41}.  
“
” appears when the RX Equalizer function is ON  
{page 57}. “ ” appears when the TX Equalizer  
function is ON {page 33}.  
—— C ——  
Appears while in Data mode {page 11} and while in  
Morse Code Decoder mode {page 38}.  
“
” or “  
” appears, when you select the DSP  
Beat Cancel 1 or Beat Cancel 2 {page 41}.  
Appears while in narrow FM mode {page 11}.  
“ ” appears when the Tone function is ON {page 26},  
and blinks during Tone scan. “ ” appears when the  
CTCSS (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System)  
function is ON, and blinks during CTCSS scan {page  
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier is ON {page  
42}.  
27}. “  
ON {page 28}.  
” appears when the Cross Tone function is  
Appears when the receiver’s attenuator is ON {page  
42}.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 GETTING ACQUAINTED  
A
B
C
D
E
F
—— F ——  
Appears when the VOX (Voice Operated Transmission)  
function is ON or the Break-in function is ON for CW  
mode {page 31}.  
(Main Display)  
In normal operating mode and various configuration  
modes, it displays the transceiver operating frequency.  
In Menu mode, it displays the various menus, and in  
Adjustment mode, it displays the adjustment values.  
Appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON  
{page 56}.  
Appears when the Speech Processor function is ON  
{page 32}.  
(Sub-display)  
When recalling a memory channel, it displays  
the Memory Channel name (if one has been  
programmed). During split frequency operation, it  
displays the frequency. When the following indications  
occur simultaneously, information is displayed in the  
following order: RIT/XIT frequency, Split frequency,  
Memory Name. In Menu mode, it displays a menu  
title. In other modes, it displays the configuration  
parameters. When the Morse Code Detector function  
is ON, the decoded characters will be displayed.  
Appears when the constant recording function is ON  
{page 63}.  
Appears when the Antenna output is enabled (DRV  
connector) {page 52}.  
Appears when the selected Menu No. is in the  
Quick Menu list {page 14}. It also appears when the  
transceiver is scanning the frequencies between the  
slow down frequency points {page 49}.  
Appears when the split-frequency operation is ON  
{page 24}.  
Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning function is  
ON {page 30}.  
“
” appears while VFO A is selected. “  
” appears  
while transmitting on a split channel in VFO A {page  
10}. “ ” appears while Menu A is being accessed in  
Menu mode {page 14}.  
Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning function is  
ON {page 32}.  
—— E ——  
“
” appears while VFO B is selected. “  
” appears  
while transmitting on a split channel in VFO B {page  
10}. “ ” appears while Menu B is being accessed in  
Menu mode {page 14}.  
Appears when the RX ANT terminal is enabled {page  
52}.  
“
” appears while a simplex memory channel  
is selected. “ ” appears while a split memory  
channel is selected {page 43}.  
Either “  
” or “  
” appears, depending on  
which antenna connector is selected {page 52}.  
“
”
appears while the internal antenna tuner  
{page 52} is in-line for operation. ” appears while  
“
receiving when the internal antenna tuner is in-line for  
operation. “ ” and “ ” blink while tuning is in progress  
{page 52}  
.
Appears when the Drive output is enabled (DRV  
connector) {page 52}.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING ACQUAINTED 2  
REAR PANEL  
ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors  
DRV connector  
Connect a drive device (DRO) or external receiver  
(ANT) to this RCA connector {page 52}.  
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT 1  
connector. If you are using 2 antennas for the HF/  
50 MHz band, connect the secondary antenna to the  
ANT 2 connector {page 1}.  
RX ANT connector  
Connect a separate receive-only antenna for HF low  
bands to this RCA connector {page 52}.  
GND post  
Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between  
the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 1}.  
MICROPHONE  
AT connector  
Mates with the connector from the cable supplied with  
the AT-300 external antenna tuner {pages 70, 74}.  
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the tuner  
for more information.  
DC 13.8 V connector  
Connect a regulated 13.8 V DC power source to this  
connector {page 1}. Use the DC cable supplied with  
the transceiver.  
COM connector  
Mates with a DB-9 female connector for connecting a  
computer or compatible transceiver {pages 60, 69}.  
Also used with the Quick Data Transfer function {page  
59} and DX PacketCluster Tune function {page 67}.  
(USB) connector  
Mates with a USB connector for connecting a  
computer via one of its USB ports {pages 60}.  
EXT.SP 8jack  
PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch  
Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plug  
for connecting an external speaker {page 2}.  
The transceiver is placed in Transmission mode when  
this non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the  
switch returns the transceiver to Reception mode.  
ACC 2 connector  
Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for  
connecting various accessory equipment, such as  
an external TNC/ MCP or a RTTY terminal  
{page 69}.  
/
Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, Memory  
Channels, or Menu selections up and down.  
Press and hold these keys to continuously change the  
settings.  
REMOTE connector  
Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting  
an HF/ 50 MHz linear amplifier {page 70, 73}.  
You can also change the operational function of these  
keys {page 56}  
KEY and PADDLE jacks  
The KEY jack mates with a 3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor  
plug for connecting an external key for CW operation.  
The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")  
3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to  
the internal electronic keyer. Refer to “Keys for CW  
(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 2} before using these jacks.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 OPERATING BASICS  
SWITCHING POWER ON/ OFF  
1 Switch the DC power supply ON.  
2 Press [ ] to switch the transceiver ON.  
RF (RADIO FREQUENCY) GAIN  
The RF gain is normally configured to the maximum  
level regardless of the operating modes. The  
transceiver has been configured to the maximum  
level at the factory. However, you may decrease the  
RF gain slightly when you have trouble hearing the  
desired signal due to excessive atmospheric noise or  
interference from other stations.  
•
If you hold the power switch for more than  
approximately 2 seconds, the transceiver will  
switch back OFF.  
•
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears on the main  
display, followed by the current frequency and  
other indicators.  
First, take note of the peak S-meter reading of  
the desired signal. Then, turn the RF control  
counterclockwise until the S-meter reads the peak  
value that you noted.  
3 To switch the transceiver OFF, press [ ] again.  
4 Switch the DC power supply OFF.  
•
Signals that are weaker than this level will be  
attenuated and reception of the station will become  
easier.  
•
You may skip step 3. After switching the  
transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON  
using only the power switch of the DC power  
supply. The transceiver remembers the power  
switch position when the DC power source is  
switched OFF.  
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna and  
the condition of the band, adjust the RF gain. When  
using FM mode, always adjust the RF gain to the  
maximum level.  
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME  
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B  
Two VFOs are available for controlling the frequency  
on the transceiver. Each VFO (VFO A and VFO B)  
works independently so that a different frequency and  
mode can be selected. For example, when SPLIT  
operation is activated, VFO A is used for reception  
and VFO B is used for transmission. The opposite  
combination is also possible.  
AF (AUDIO FREQUENCY) GAIN  
Turn the AF control clockwise to increase the audio  
level and counterclockwise to decrease it.  
Press [A/B (A=B)] to toggle between VFO A and B.  
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume  
of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW TX sidetone. The  
audio level for Digital mode operation is also independent of the  
AF control setting.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 OPERATING BASICS  
SELECTING A BAND  
SELECTING A MODE  
Press one of the following keys to select your desired  
mode set: [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK (REV)], or [FM/AM  
(FM-N)].  
Press [1.8 (1)] ~ [50 (0)] or [GENE] to select your  
desired band.  
[LSB/USB]  
Press to select LSB or USB mode. Press again to  
toggle between LSB and USB mode.  
While in LSB mode, press [DATA] to toggle between  
LSB and LSB-DATA mode. Likewise, while in USB  
mode press [DATA] to toggle between USB and USB-  
DATA mode.  
Additionally, while in LSB-DATA or USB-DATA mode,  
you can press [LSB/USB] to toggle between LSB-  
DATA and USB-DATA mode.  
•
•
Press each key to cycle through the 3 default  
settings as shown in the table below.  
Each setting can be modified with your personal  
preference for frequency and mode. After  
modifying the setting, pressing the key again will  
save that setting.  
[CW/FSK (REV)]  
Press to select CW or FSK mode. Press again to  
toggle between CW and FSK mode.  
While in CW mode, press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)]  
to toggle between CW and CW-R mode. Likewise,  
while in FSK mode press and hold [CW/FSK (REV] to  
toggle between FSK and FSK-R mode.  
Additionally, while in CW-R or FSK-R mode, you can  
press [CW/FSK (REV)] to toggle between CW-R and  
FSK-R mode.  
Default Setting (MHz)/  
Mode  
Frequency  
Range  
Key  
Type  
(MHz)  
1
2
3
1.8/  
CW  
1.82/  
CW  
1.84/  
CW  
K
E
K
E
K
E
[1.8 (1)]  
1.62 ~ 2  
3 ~ 4  
[FM/AM (FM-N)]  
Press to select FM or AM mode. Press again to  
toggle between FM and AM mode.  
1.83/  
CW  
1.84/  
CW  
1.81/  
CW  
3.8/  
While in FM mode, press and hold [FM/AM (FM-N)]  
to toggle between FM and FM-NAR mode, or press  
[DATA] to toggle between FM and FM-DATA mode.  
Additionally, while in FM-NAR mode, press [DATA] to  
toggle between FM-NAR and FM-NAR-DATA mode  
and while in FM-DATA mode, press and hold [FM/AM  
(FM-N)] to toggle between FM-DATA and FM-NAR-  
DATA mode.  
LSB  
3.5/  
LSB  
3.7/  
LSB  
[3.5 (2)]  
[7 (3)]  
3.79/  
LSB  
7.1/  
LSB  
7.2/  
LSB  
7.0/  
LSB  
6.5 ~ 7.5  
10 ~ 10.5  
7.05/  
LSB  
7.1/  
LSB  
While in AM mode, press [DATA] to toggle between  
AM and AM-DATA mode.  
10.1/ 10.12/ 10.14/  
CW  
[10 (4)] All  
CW  
CW  
14.0/  
USB  
14.1/  
USB  
14.2/  
USB  
[14 (5)] All 13.5 ~ 14.5  
18.068/ 18.11/ 18.15/  
USB USB USB  
[18 (6)] All  
18 ~ 19  
21.0/ 21.15/ 21.3/  
USB USB USB  
[21 (7)] All 20.5 ~ 21.5  
24.89/ 24.93/ 24.95/  
[24 (8)] All  
24 ~ 25  
Access Menu No. 27 then press [M.IN] to select “on”  
USB  
USB  
USB  
to turn the Auto Mode selection ON. When it is ON,  
28/  
USB  
28.3/  
USB  
29/  
FM  
“
” appears. As a default, if you change the  
[28 (9)] All  
27.5 ~ 30  
frequency above or below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver  
automatically switches modes; LSB for frequencies  
under 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies 9.5 MHz and  
over.You can further add the frequency borders to the  
Auto Mode selection {page 53}.  
50.125/  
K
[50 (0)]  
E
USB  
50/  
USB  
51/  
FM  
50 ~ 54  
50.15/  
USB  
5.3305/  
USB  
K
[GENE]  
E
0.1357/ 0.4720/  
0.03 ~ 60  
CW  
CW  
5.2585/  
USB  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 OPERATING BASICS  
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH  
MULTI-FUNCTION METER  
The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker  
when no signals are present. With the squelch level  
correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually  
receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch  
level, the stronger the signals must be to receive. The  
appropriate squelch level depends on the ambient RF  
noise conditions.  
The multi-function meter measures the parameters  
in the table below. The S-meter and FILTER scales  
appears when the transceiver is in receive mode, and  
the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit mode.  
Each press of [METER (DRV)] cycles between the  
ALC, COMP, and SWR meters. Peak readings for the  
S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR functions are  
held momentarily.  
Turn the SQL control when there are no signals  
present to select the squelch level at which the  
background noise is just eliminated; the green TX-RX  
LED will turn off. Many ham operators prefer leaving  
the SQL control fully counterclockwise unless  
operating on a full-carrier mode such as FM. The  
squelch level for the transceiver is preset at the factory  
to approximately the 9 o’clock position for FM and 11  
o’clock for SSB and AM.  
ALC  
COMP  
TUNING A FREQUENCY  
Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP  
to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control  
counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the  
frequency.  
SWR  
Meter Name  
S
Parameters Measured  
Strength of received signals  
Transmission output power  
PWR  
ALC  
Automatic level control status  
Antenna system standing wave ratio  
SWR  
Speech compression level when  
using the Speech Processor  
{page 32}  
You may prefer directly entering a frequency using  
the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far  
from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press  
the numeric keys as necessary. For details, refer to  
“Direct Frequency Entry” {page 29}.  
COMP  
FILTER  
IF filter width {page 40}  
Note:  
◆
The COMP meter functions only when the Speech  
Processor is ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
◆
◆
Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.  
The S-meter responds differently in FM mode, compared to  
other modes. This is not a malfunction.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING BASICS 3  
MICROPHONE GAIN  
TRANSMITTING  
The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB  
or AM mode is selected without using the speech  
processor {pages 21, 22}.  
For voice communications, press and hold Mic [PTT]  
and speak into the microphone in your normal voice.  
When you finish speaking, release Mic [PTT] to  
receive.  
1 Press [MIC (CAR)].  
To transmit CW, press [VOX (REV)] to turn the Break-  
in function ON. “  
” appears. Close the key or keyer  
paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {page 2}, then  
select CW using [CW/FSK (REV)].  
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, refer to  
“BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 21.  
SELECTING TRANSMISSION POWER  
•
The current microphone gain level appears.  
The range is from 0 to 100 with a default of 50.  
It is wise to select a lower transmission power if  
communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of  
interfering with others on the band. When operating  
from battery power, selecting a lower transmission  
power allows you more operating time before  
recharging is necessary. This transceiver allows  
you to change the transmission power even while  
transmitting.  
2 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
•
1 Press [PWR (TX MONI)].  
3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter  
reflects your voice level but does not exceed the  
ALC limit.  
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust  
the MULTI/CH control so that the power meter  
slightly reflects your voice level.  
FM: Access Menu No. 53 and select “1” (Normal),  
“2” (Medium), or “3” (High) for the microphone gain  
if necessary {page 21}.  
•
The current transmission power appears.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control counterclockwise to  
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the  
power.  
4 Release Mic [PTT] to receive.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control setting.  
5 Press [MIC (CAR)] or [CLR] to exit the Microphone  
gain adjustment.  
Note: When using the MC-90 microphone in FM mode, select  
“3” (High) for the microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity  
is low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient modulation. For  
other microphones, select either “1” (Normal) or “2” (Medium).  
3 Press [PWR (TX MONI)] or [CLR] to complete the  
setting.  
Note: You can access Menu No. 54, and select “on” to change  
the step size from 5 W to 1 W {page 58}.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 MENU SETUP  
WHAT IS A MENU?  
QUICK MENU  
Many functions on this transceiver are selected or  
configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather than  
through the physical controls of the transceiver. Once  
familiar with the Menu system, you will appreciate  
the versatility it offers. You can customize the various  
timings, settings, and programming functions on this  
transceiver to meet your needs without using many  
controls and switches.  
Because the number of functions this transceiver  
provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items  
in each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu  
Nos. to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to  
create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You  
can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently  
use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the  
Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.  
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU  
1 Press [MENU].  
MENU A/ MENU B  
This transceiver has 2 menus: Menu A and Menu B.  
These menus contain identical functions and can be  
configured independently. The transceiver, therefore,  
allows you to switch between 2 different environments  
quickly and easily. For example, you can configure  
Menu A for DXing and contesting while Menu B is  
for relaxed local ragchewing. By switching from  
Menu A to Menu B, you can instantly change the  
Menu configuration and key assignment to suit your  
current operating style. Or, 2 operators may share  
a single transceiver by dedicating one Menu to each  
operator. Both operators can always enjoy their own  
configuration.  
2 Press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or turn the MULTI/CH  
control to select the desired Menu No.  
3 Press [FINE (F.LOCK)].  
•
“ ” appears, indicating that the Menu item has  
been added to the Quick Menu.  
•
To remove the item from the Quick Menu, press  
[FINE (F.LOCK)] again. “ ” disappears.  
4 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
USING THE QUICK MENU  
1 Press [MENU].  
MENU ACCESS  
1 Press [MENU].  
2 Press [MHz].  
•
The Menu No. and setting appear on the  
display, and the explanation of the menu  
appears on the sub-display.  
•
“
” appears.  
3 Press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or turn the MULTI/CH  
2 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select Menu A or B.  
control to select the desired Quick Menu No.  
•
“ ” or “ ” appears, indicating which Menu is  
selected.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)], or Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to change the current setting for the  
selected Menu No.  
3 Press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or turn the MULTI/CH  
control to select the desired Menu No.  
•
When the Menu is registered to the Quick Menu  
list, “ ” appears.  
•
Each time you change the Menu No.,  
a different scrolling message appears on the  
sub-display, describing the Menu No.  
5 Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.  
Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, Press  
[Q-M.IN]/[Q-MR] or turning the MULTI/CH control in step 2  
causes “CHECK” to be output in Morse code.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)], or Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a parameter.  
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU SETUP 4  
MENU CONFIGURATION  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Category  
No.  
00  
Page  
Firmware version  
–
79  
FIRMWARE VERSION  
Power on message  
HELLO/ EDIT  
KENWOOD  
01  
68  
55  
POWER ON MESSAGE  
Display brightness  
OFF/ 1 ~ 6  
02  
03  
Off, 1: minimum, 6: maximum  
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS  
4
Operator  
Interface  
Display backlight color  
1 ~ 10  
1
55  
55  
1: amber, 2 ~ 9: mixed colors, 10: green  
BACKLIGHT COLOR  
Panel key response for double function  
1: 0.2 second, 2: 0.5 second, 3: 1 second  
1/ 2/ 3  
04  
PANEL KEY RESPONSE FOR DOUBLE  
FUNCTIONS  
2
Beep output level  
OFF/ 1 ~ 20 (1 step)  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
54  
23, 36  
63  
OFF, 1: minimum, 20: maximum  
BEEP VOLUME  
10  
Sidetone volume  
OFF/ 1 ~ 20 (1 step)  
Volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 20: maximum  
SIDETONE VOLUME  
10  
VGS-1 message playback volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 20: maximum  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK VOLUME  
VGS-1 announcement volume  
OFF, 1: minimum, 20: maximum  
VOICE GUIDE VOLUME  
VGS-1 announcement speed  
0: slow, 4: fast  
OFF/ 1 ~ 20 (1 step)  
10  
OFF/ 1~ 20 (1 step)  
66  
10  
0 ~ 4 (1 step)  
1
66  
Voice Guide  
VOICE GUIDE SPEED  
VGS-1 announcement language  
EN: English, JP: Japanese  
VOICE GUIDE LANGUAGE  
VGS-1 auto announcement  
AUTO ANNOUNCEMENT  
MHz step  
EN/ JP  
66  
EN  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
11  
12  
63  
29  
1
0.1/ 0.5/ 1 [MHz]  
1
MHZ STEP  
Tuning control adjustment rate  
250/ 500/ 1000 [Hz]  
13  
14  
30  
29  
TUNING CONTROL CHANGE RATE PER  
1000  
OFF/ ON  
ON  
Tuning  
REVOLUTION  
Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by using the  
MULTI/CH control  
FREQUENCY ROUNDING OFF WHEN USING  
MULTI/CH CONTROL  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 MENU SETUP  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI/CH  
control in AM mode on the AM broadcast band  
OFF/ ON  
15  
29  
MULTI/CH CONTROL 9KHZ STEP CHANGE IN  
AM BROADCAST BAND  
K type: OFF  
E type: ON  
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
SSB mode  
OFF/ 0.5/ 1/ 2.5/ 5/ 10  
[kHz]  
16  
17  
29  
29  
MULTI/CH CONTROL  
5
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
CW/ FSK mode  
OFF/ 0.5/ 1/ 2.5/ 5/ 10  
[kHz]  
CW MULTI/CH CONTROL  
0.5  
Tuning  
(continued)  
OFF/ 5/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/  
15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 50/ 100  
[kHz]  
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
AM mode  
18  
29  
AM MULTI/CH CONTROL  
5
OFF/ 5/ 6.25/ 10/ 12.5/  
15/ 20/ 25/ 30/ 50/ 100  
[kHz]  
Frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in  
FM mode  
19  
20  
29  
25  
FM MULTI/CH CONTROL  
10  
Shiftable RX frequency during split transmission  
OFF/ ON  
SHIFTABLE RX FREQUENCY DURING SPLIT  
TRANSMISSION  
OFF  
Number of quick memory channels  
3/ 5/ 10 [ch]  
5
21  
22  
23  
47  
44  
49  
NUMBER OF QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS  
Tunable memory recall frequencies  
Memory Channel  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
TUNABLE MEMORY RECALL FREQUENCIES  
Program scan partially slowed  
OFF/ ON  
ON  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED  
100/ 200/ 300/ 400/ 500  
[Hz]  
Slow down frequency range for the program scan  
24  
49  
PROGRAM SLOW-SCAN RANGE  
Program scan hold  
300  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Scan  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
50  
50  
53  
41  
41  
41  
PROGRAM SCAN HOLD  
Scan resume method  
TO/ CO  
TO  
SCAN RESUME METHOD  
Auto mode operation  
ON/ OFF  
OFF  
Auto Mode  
AUTO MODE OPERATION  
SSB filter type selection  
1/ 2  
SSB FILTER TYPE SELECTION  
SSB DATA filter type selection  
SSB DATA FILTER TYPE SELECTION  
Auto notch tracking speed  
AUTO NOTCH TRACKING SPEED  
1 (HI/LO)  
1/ 2  
2 (WIDTH/SHIFT)  
0 ~ 4 (1 step)  
2
DSP Function  
10/ 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/  
500 [Hz]  
TX filter for SSB/AM low cut  
31  
32  
33  
33  
TX FILTER FOR SSB/AM LOW CUT  
TX filter for SSB/AM high cut  
300  
2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/  
2900/ 3000 [Hz]  
TX FILTER FOR SSB/AM HIGH CUT  
2700  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU SETUP 4  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
10/ 100/ 200/ 300/ 400/  
500 [Hz]  
TX filter for SSB-DATA low cut  
33  
33  
TX FILTER FOR SSB-DATA LOW CUT  
TX filter for SSB-DATA high cut  
300  
DSP Function  
(continued)  
2500/ 2600/ 2700/ 2800/  
2900/ 3000 [Hz]  
34  
35  
33  
32  
TX FILTER FOR SSB-DATA HIGH CUT  
Speech processor effect  
2700  
SOFT/ HARD  
HARD  
SPEECH PROCESSOR EFFECT  
DSP TX equalizer  
oFF: Off, Hb1: High boost1, Hb2: High boost2, FP:  
Formant pass, bb1: Bass boost1,  
bb2: Bass boost2, c: Conventional,  
OFF/ HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/  
BB2/ C/ U  
36  
37  
33  
57  
U: User (Reserved for ARCP software)  
DSP TX EQUALIZER  
OFF  
Equalizer  
DSP RX equalizer  
oFF: Off, Hb1: High boost1, Hb2: High boost2, FP:  
Formant pass, bb1 Bass boost1,  
bb2: Bass boost2, FLAT: Flat  
OFF/ HB1/ HB2/ FP/ BB1/  
BB2/ FLAT/ U  
U: User (Reserved for ARCP software)  
DSP RX EQUALIZER  
OFF  
Electronic keyer mode  
A/ B  
38  
39  
40  
41  
34  
35  
23  
35  
ELECTRONIC KEYER MODE  
Keying priority over playback  
KEYING PRIORITY OVER PLAYBACK  
CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency  
CW RX PITCH/TX SIDETONE FREQUENCY  
CW rise time  
B
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
300 ~ 1000 (50 [Hz] step)  
800  
1/ 2/ 4/ 6 [ms]  
6
CW RISE TIME  
AUTO/ 2.5 ~ 4.0  
(0.1 step)  
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio  
42  
35  
CW WEIGHTING  
AUTO  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio  
REVERSED CW WEIGHTING  
Bug key function  
43  
44  
45  
35  
35  
37  
CW  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
BUG KEY FUNCTION  
Reversed dot and dash keying  
REVERSED DOT AND DASH KEYING  
MIC UP/DWN key paddle function  
PF: PF key PA: Paddle  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
PF/ PA  
46  
37  
MIC UP/DWN KEY FUNCTION  
Auto CW TX when keying in SSB  
AUTO CW TX WHEN KEYING IN SSB  
Frequency correction for changing SSB to CW  
PF  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
47  
48  
37  
37  
OFF/ ON  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR SSB-TO-CW  
CHANGE  
OFF  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 MENU SETUP  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
No Break-in operation while adjusting keying  
speed  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
CW (continued)  
49  
34  
NO BREAK-IN OPERATION WHILE ADJUSTING  
KEYING SPEED  
FSK shift  
170/ 200/ 425/ 850 [Hz]  
50  
51  
52  
39  
39  
39  
FSK SHIFT  
170  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
FSK keying polarity  
REVERSED FSK KEY-DOWN POLARITY  
FSK tone frequency  
FSK TONE FREQUENCY  
MIC gain for FM  
FSK  
1275/ 2125 [Hz]  
2125  
1 ~ 3  
FM  
53 1: Low, 2: Mid, 3: Hi  
22  
FM MIC GAIN  
1
Fine transmission power tuning  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
54  
58  
58  
FINE TRANSMIT POWER CHANGE STEPS  
TX Control  
OFF/ 3/ 5/ 10/ 20/ 30  
(min)  
Time-out timer  
55  
TIME-OUT TIMER  
OFF  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
OFF  
Xverter/ power down of Xverter  
56  
Transverter  
58  
52  
XVERTER/ POWER DOWN OF XVERTER  
TX hold when AT completes the tuning  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
57  
ANTENNA TUNER TX HOLD  
Antenna Tuner  
In-line AT while receiving  
58  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
52  
ANTENNA TUNER FOR RECEPTION  
Linear amplifier control relay for HF band  
OFF/ 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5  
OFF  
59  
55  
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL RELAY  
Linear Amp  
Message  
Linear amplifier control relay for 50 MHz band  
OFF/ 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5  
OFF  
60  
55  
50MHZ LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL RELAY  
Constant recording  
61  
OFF/ ON  
ON  
63  
CONSTANT RECORDING  
Repeat the playback  
62  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
35, 62  
35, 62  
PLAYBACK REPEAT  
Interval time for repeating the playback  
0 ~ 60 [s] (1 step)  
10  
63  
PLAYBACK INTERVAL TIME  
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave operation  
OFF/ ON  
64  
60  
TRANSFER SPLIT FREQUENCY DATA TO  
ANOTHER TRANSCEIVER  
OFF  
Split/ Transfer  
TX Inhibit  
Permit to write the transferred Split frequencies to  
the target VFOs  
OFF/ ON  
65  
66  
60  
33  
COPY SPLIT FREQUENCY DATA TO VFO  
OFF  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
TX inhibit  
TX INHIBIT  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU SETUP 4  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
4800/ 9600/ 19200/  
38400/ 57600/ 115200  
COM port communication speed***  
COM PORT BAUDRATE  
67  
60  
9600 (bps)  
PC  
(Communication)  
4800/ 9600/ 19200/  
38400/ 57600/ 115200  
USB port communication speed***  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
60  
61  
61  
61  
61  
61  
USB PORT BAUDRATE  
115200 (bps)  
ACC2/ USB  
Audio input line selection for data communications  
AUDIO INPUT LINE SELECTION FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
ACC2  
Audio source of SEND/PTT transmission for data  
mode  
FRONT/ REAR  
SOURCE OF SEND/PTT TRANSMISSION  
FRONT  
Audio level of USB input for data communications  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
AUDIO LEVEL OF USB INPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4
Audio level of USB output for data communications  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
External Audio  
(Input/ Output)  
AUDIO LEVEL OF USB OUTPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4
Audio level of ACC2 input for data communications  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
AUDIO LEVEL OF ACC2 INPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
AUDIO level of ACC2 output for data  
communications  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
74  
75  
61  
61  
AUDIO LEVEL OF ACC2 OUTPUT FOR DATA  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4
Mixing beep tones for ACC2/USB audio output  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
MIXING BEEP TONES FOR ACC2/USB AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
Data VOX  
OFF/ ON  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
31  
32  
32  
32  
66  
33  
61  
61  
VOX OPERATION WITH DATA INPUT  
Data VOX delay time  
OFF  
0 ~ 100 (5 step)  
DATA VOX DELAY TIME  
Data VOX gain for the USB audio input  
USB VOX GAIN  
50  
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
0 ~ 9 (1 step)  
4
Data VOX gain for the ACC2 terminal  
ACC2 VOX GAIN  
External  
Accessory  
Control  
PKS polarity  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
REVERSED PKS POLARITY  
Busy lockout (TX)  
OFF/ ON  
OFF  
BUSY FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LOCKOUT  
CTCSS mute control  
1/ 2  
CTCSS MUTE CONTROL  
PSQ control signal logic  
PSQ OUTPUT LOGIC  
1
LO/ OPEN  
LO  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 MENU SETUP  
Description  
Display*  
Settings**  
Default**  
Ref.  
Page  
Category  
No.  
OFF/ BSY/ SQL/ SND/  
BSY-SND/ SQL-SND  
PSQ source output condition  
External  
Accessory  
Control  
84  
61  
PSQ SOURCE  
SQL  
DRO/ ANT  
DRO  
DRV connector output function  
DRV CONNECTOR FUNCTION  
APO (Auto Power Off) function  
AUTO POWER OFF  
(continued)  
85  
86  
52  
52  
OFF/ 60/ 120/ 180 [min]  
OFF  
Timer  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
Front panel PF A key assignment  
FRONT PANEL PF A KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Front panel PF B key assignment  
FRONT PANEL PF B KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Front panel RIT key assignment  
RIT KEY ASSIGNMENT  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
56  
200 [VOICE1]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
201 [VOICE2]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
165 [RIT]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
Front panel XIT key assignment  
XIT KEY ASSIGNMENT  
166 [XIT]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
Front panel CL key assignment  
CL KEY ASSIGNMENT  
167 [CL]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
Front panel MULTI/CH key assignment  
MULTI CH KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Front panel MULTI/CH key assignment (CW)  
CW MULTI CH KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone PF 1 key assignment  
MIC PF 1 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone PF 2 key assignment  
MIC PF 2 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone PF 3 key assignment  
MIC PF 3 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone PF 4 key assignment  
MIC PF 4 KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone DWN key assignment  
MIC DOWN KEY ASSIGNMENT  
Microphone UP key assignment  
MIC UP KEY ASSIGNMENT  
131 [PWR]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
PF Keys  
133 [KEY]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
151 [A/B]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
148 [SPLIT]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
154 [M>V]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
203 [MONITOR]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
207 [DOWN]  
0 ~ 99, 120 ~ 170,  
200 ~ 209, OFF  
208 [UP]  
*
The bolded lettering of the display message is what appears on the display while paused.  
** Settings and default values may be modified.  
*** After changing this setting via the menu, turn the power OFF and then back ON to implement the change.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
SSB TRANSMISSION  
AM TRANSMISSION  
SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF  
Amateur radio bands. Compared with other voice  
modes, SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for  
communications. SSB also allows long distance  
communications with minimum transmission power.  
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its  
own advantages. Although long distance DX contacts  
may be less common while using AM, the superior  
audio quality characteristic of AM operation is one  
reason why some hams prefer this mode.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
2 Press [LSB/USB] until “USB” or “LSB” appears on  
2 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] until “AM” appears.  
the operating mode display.  
•
If “AM” does not appear, select “FM” first, then  
press [FM/AM (FM-N)]. The mode indicator  
changes to “AM”.  
•
If the desired sideband (“USB” or “LSB”) does  
not appear, select the other sideband first.  
Then, press [LSB/USB]. The mode indicator  
changes to your desired sideband.  
•
“USB” represents the upper sideband and  
“LSB” represents the lower sideband. Normally,  
USB is used for the communications for  
10 MHz and above while LSB is used for the  
frequencies below 10 MHz.  
3 Press [MIC (CAR)] to enter the Microphone gain  
adjustment mode.  
•
The current gain level appears on the sub-  
display.  
4 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
•
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
3 Press [MIC (CAR)] to adjust the Microphone gain.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
•
The current gain level appears on the sub-  
display.  
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the  
MULTI/CH control so that the power meter slightly  
reflects your voice level.  
•
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
4 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
•
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
•
You may want to use the Speech Processor.  
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 32} for  
details.  
5 Speak into the microphone and turn the  
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects  
your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.  
6 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control position.  
•
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.  
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
7 Press [MIC (CAR)] or [CLR] to exit the Microphone  
gain adjustment mode.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 29, for information on additional useful operation  
functions.  
•
You may want to use the Speech Processor.  
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 32} for  
details.  
Note: When the TX power meter reading exceeds the value that  
you specified in the TX Power setting {page 58}, decrease the  
microphone gain or adjust your tone and level of voice.  
6 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control position.  
7 Press [MIC (CAR)] or [CLR] to exit the Microphone  
gain adjustment.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 29, for information on additional useful operation  
functions.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS  
FM TRANSMISSION  
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM  
FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or  
UHF frequencies. As for HF and the 6 m band,  
29 MHz and 51-54 MHz bands are commonly used  
for FM operation.You can also utilize 10 m/ 6 m band  
repeaters to reach your friends when they are outside  
or skipped over from your coverage. Although FM  
requires a wider bandwidth when compared to SSB  
or AM mode, it has the finest audio quality among  
these modes. When combined with the full-quieting  
aspect of FM signals, which suppresses background  
noise on the frequency, FM can be the best method  
for maintaining casual communications with your local  
friends.  
Select wide band or narrow band TX deviation  
depending on whether the other station is using  
wide band or narrow band filter for FM mode. While  
“NAR” appears, the TS-590SG transceiver transmits  
signals in narrow band FM but the reception IF  
filter bandwidth remains unchanged (Wide). The  
deviation selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion  
or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will  
encounter.  
1 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] until “FM” appears.  
•
If “FM” does not appear, select “AM” first, then  
press [FM/AM (FM-N)]. The mode indicator  
changes to “FM”.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
2 Press and hold [FM/AM (FM-N)] to toggle the  
selection between wide and narrow TX deviation.  
1 Select an operating frequency.  
•
“
” appears when narrow TX deviation is  
2 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] until “FM” appears.  
selected.  
•
If “FM” does not appear, select “AM”, then press  
[FM/AM (FM-N)]. The mode indicator changes  
to “FM”.  
CW TRANSMISSION  
3 Press and hold Mic [PTT].  
CW operators know that this mode is very reliable  
when communicating under worst conditions. It may  
be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being  
equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes,  
however, do not have the long history of service nor  
the simplicity that CW provides.  
•
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on  
automatic TX/ RX switching.  
4 Speak into the microphone in your normal voice.  
•
Speaking too close to the microphone or too  
loudly may increase distortion and reduce  
intelligibility at the receiving end.  
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that  
supports a variety of functions. For details on using  
these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”  
{page 34}.  
•
You can switch the Microphone gain for FM  
between 1 (Normal), 2 (Medium), and 3 (High)  
by using Menu No. 53. 1 (Normal) is usually  
appropriate; however, select 3 (High) if other  
stations report that your modulation is weak.  
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,  
beginning on page 10, for details on how to receive.  
1 Select the operating frequency.  
2 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until “CW” appears.  
5 Release Mic [PTT] to return to Reception mode.  
•
If “CW” does not appear, select “FSK” first, then  
press [CW/FSK (REV)]. The mode indicator  
changes to “CW”.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control position.  
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on  
page 29, for additional information on useful operation  
functions.  
•
To precisely tune in another station, use Auto  
Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”  
{page 23}.  
Note: Microphone gain adjustment for SSB or AM has no  
effect in FM mode. In FM mode, you must select 1 (Normal), 2  
(Medium), or 3 (High) in Menu No. 53.  
3 Press [SEND].  
•
The TX-RX LED lights red.  
4 Operate the Keys or Paddle.  
•
As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone  
that lets you monitor your own transmission.  
5 Press [SEND] to return to Reception mode.  
•
The TX-RX LED lights green or turns off,  
depending on the SQL control setting.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS 5  
AUTO ZERO-BEAT  
CARRIER LEVEL  
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a  
CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly  
matches your transmit frequency with the station you  
are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your  
chances of being heard by the other station.  
When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you can adjust  
the carrier level.  
1 Press and hold [MIC (CAR].  
•
The current gain level appears on the sub  
display.  
1 Tune to the CW signal using the Tuning control.  
2 Press [CW T. (AGC OFF)] to start Auto Zero-beat  
while CW is selected for the operating mode.  
•
“CW TUNE” appears.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter  
reads within the limits of the ALC zone.  
•
For AM mode, adjust the MULTI/CH control so  
that the ALC meter just begins to indicate.  
•
Your reception frequency automatically changes  
so that the pitch (tone) of the received signal  
exactly matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch  
frequency that you have selected. Refer to “TX  
SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” {below}.  
3 Press and hold [MIC (CAR] again or press [CLR]  
to complete the setting.  
•
•
When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”  
disappears.  
If matching is unsuccessful, the previous  
frequency is restored.  
3 To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [CW T. (AGC OFF)]  
or [CLR].  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is normally  
within 5 Hz.  
Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target  
station is too slow or if some interference is present.  
When the RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change  
to make the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.  
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY  
As you send CW, you will hear tones from  
the transceiver speaker. These are called TX  
(transmission) sidetones. Listening to these tones,  
you can monitor what you are transmitting. You may  
also use the tones to ensure that your key contacts  
are closing, the keyer is functioning, or to practice  
sending without actually putting a signal on the air.  
RX (reception) pitch refers to the frequency of CW that  
you hear after tuning in a CW station.  
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and  
RX pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu No.  
40 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for  
you. The selectable range is from 300 Hz to 1000 Hz  
in steps of 50 Hz (default is 800 Hz).  
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access  
Menu No. 06. The selections range from 1 to 20 and  
OFF (default is 10).  
Note:  
◆
The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of  
the TX sidetone.  
◆
When changing the CW pitch/ side tone, the shift amount  
of the receive filter is automatically applied to the CW pitch/  
side tone. (In Quick Memory mode, the CW pitch/ side tone  
is not revised since the receive filter information stored in the  
Quick Memory has priority.)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
specified frequency is lower, prefix a value of  
"0" to the frequency.  
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION  
Usually you can communicate with other stations  
using a single frequency for receiving and transmitting.  
In this case, you select only one frequency on either  
VFO A or VFO B. However, there are cases where  
you must select one frequency for receiving and a  
different frequency for transmitting. This requires the  
use of 2 VFOs. This is referred to as “split-frequency  
operation”. One typical case which requires this type  
of operation is when you use an FM repeater {page  
25}. Another typical case is when you call a rare DX  
station.  
•
For example, enter a value “5” if you need  
to increment the frequency by 5 kHz, and  
enter a value “05” if you need to decrement  
the frequency by 5 kHz. When the input is  
completed, the transmitted frequency is set,  
split operation is enabled, and “  
blinking and remains lit.  
” stops  
TURN THE TUNING CONTROL TO SEARCH FOR  
THE TRANSMIT FREQUENCY  
To directly search for the transmit frequency by  
rotating the Tuning control, follow the instruction  
below while receiving on the main band of a signal  
from the DX station.  
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that  
operator may immediately get many simultaneous  
responses. Often, such a station is lost under the noise  
and confusion of many calling stations. If you find that  
you are suddenly being called by many operators, it  
is your responsibility to control the situation. You may  
announce that you will be “listening up 5 (kHz, from  
your present transmission frequency)”, or “listening  
down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.  
1 Press and hold [SPLIT].  
•
“
” blinks.  
2 Turn the Tuning control to search for the frequency.  
Press [CLR] to stop searching.  
3 Press [SPLIT] to end.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
•
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
•
The frequency is configured as the transmit  
frequency and split operation begins.  
2 Select an operating frequency.  
•
•
This frequency will be used for transmission.  
•
“
” lights.  
To copy the selected VFO frequency to the  
other VFO, press and hold [A/B (A=B)].  
TF-SET (TRANSMISSION FREQUENCY SET)  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select the other VFO.  
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your  
transmission frequency and reception frequency.  
Canceling this function immediately restores the  
original transmission and reception frequencies.  
By activating TF-SET, you can listen on your transmit  
frequency, and change it while listening. This allows  
you to check whether or not the newly selected  
transmission frequency is free of interference.  
4 Select an operating frequency.  
•
This frequency will be used for reception.  
5 Press [SPLIT].  
•
•
“
” appears.  
Each time you press [A/B (A=B)], the reception  
and transmission frequencies are swapped.  
1 Configure split-frequency operation as explained in  
the previous section.  
2 Press and hold [TF-SET], then turn the Tuning  
control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to change the  
transmission frequency.  
6 To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT]  
again.  
•
“
” disappears.  
DIRECTLY ENTERING THE FREQUENCY SPLIT  
SPECIFIED BY A DXer  
To directly enter the difference between the TX  
and RX frequencies specified by a DXer, follow the  
instruction below while receiving on the main band of  
a signal from the DXer.  
•
The transceiver receives on the frequency as  
you change, but the frequency shown on the  
sub-display (the original reception frequency)  
stays unchanged.  
3 Release [TF-SET].  
You are now receiving again on your original  
reception frequency.  
•
1 Press and hold [SPLIT].  
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup  
often depends on making a well-timed call on a clear  
frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively  
clear transmission frequency and to transmit at the  
exact instant when the DX station is listening but the  
majority of the groups aren’t transmitting. Switch  
your reception and transmission frequencies by using  
the TF-SET function and listen to your transmission  
•
“
” blinks.  
2 Enter the frequency difference (the “split”) in the  
order of kHz as specified by the DX station.  
•
If the frequency specified by the DXer is higher  
than your current frequency, enter the specified  
frequency in the order of kHz using the numeric  
and band-select keypad. Conversely, if the  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS 6  
Note:  
◆
frequency. You will soon learn the rhythm of the  
DX station and the pileup. The more proficient you  
become at using this function, the more DX stations  
you will contact.  
When programming 2 separate frequencies using 2 VFOs,  
be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.  
◆
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused  
by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your  
signal to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.  
Note:  
◆
TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.  
◆
You can change the transmission frequency even when the  
Frequency lock function is ON.  
29.520 MHz  
◆
◆
An RIT offset frequency is not added; however, an XIT offset  
frequency is added to the transmit frequency during TF-SET.  
88.5 Hz  
29.620 MHz  
The TF-SET function does not operate in Simplex mode.  
However, when the XIT function is ON and the RIT function  
is OFF, the TF-SET function will operate in Simplex mode. In  
this situation, you can set the XIT frequency while operating  
TF-SET by rotating the Tuning knob or pressing the MIC [UP]  
/ MIC [DOWN] keys.  
29.620 MHz  
29.520 MHz  
88.5 Hz  
SHIFTABLE RX FREQUENCY DURING SPLIT  
TRANSMISSION  
As the factory default setting, when rotating the Tuning  
knob during split transmission, the transmit frequency  
will change. By following the procedures below, when  
rotating the Tuning knob during split transmission, you  
can change the receive frequency.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
” or “ ” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
•
“
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 20.  
2 Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/CH control to  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “on”  
select the reception frequency.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
3 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM mode.  
•
When you switch the transceiver ON while this  
function is set to ON, the decimal point at the  
right end digit of the main display flashes for  
approximately 2 seconds after the Power On  
message is displayed.  
4 Press and hold [A/B (A=B)] to duplicate the  
frequencies and other data to the other VFO.  
5 Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/CH control to  
select the transmission frequency.  
6 Press [AGC/T (SEL] to turn the Tone function ON if  
the repeater requires a subtone.  
FM REPEATER OPERATION  
•
•
“ ” appears.  
Most Amateur radio voice repeaters use a separate  
reception and transmission frequency. The  
transmission frequency may be higher or lower than  
the reception frequency. In addition, some repeaters  
may require the transceiver to transmit a subtone  
before the repeater can be used.  
Refer to “Selecting a Tone Frequency” for more  
details on the subtone {page 26}.  
Compared to simplex communication, you can  
usually transmit over much greater distances by  
using a repeater. Repeaters are typically located  
on a mountain top or other elevated location. Often  
they operate at higher ERP (Effective Radiated  
Power) than a typical station. This combination of  
elevation and high ERP allows communications over  
considerable distances.  
•
To quit the Subtone function, press [AGC/T (SEL)]  
twice.  
7 Press [SPLIT].  
” appears.  
•
“
8 Press [A/B (A=B)] to return to the original  
reception frequency.  
HF/ 6 m band repeaters usually operate in the  
29 MHz FM sub-band and 51-54 MHz band. This  
special service combines the advantages of FM  
operation, good fidelity with noise and interference  
immunity, with the excitement of HF DX (long  
distance) communications. Even on a quiet day,  
10 m FM provides reliable around-town  
9 Press Mic [PTT] to transmit.  
•
•
The VFO changes to the other VFO to transmit.  
Each time you press [A/B (A=B)], the reception  
and transmission frequencies are swapped.  
communications with the potential for sudden DX from  
across the country or around the world.  
10 Press [SPLIT] to quit split-frequency operation.  
” disappears.  
•
“
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
The data that you select in steps 1 to 8 can be stored  
in memory. Refer to “Split-Frequency Channels” {page  
43}.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
No.  
Note:  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
67.0 11  
97.4 22 141.3 33 206.5  
◆
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused  
by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your  
signal to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.  
69.3 12 100.0 23 146.2 34 210.7  
71.9 13 103.5 24 151.4 35 218.1  
74.4 14 107.2 25 156.7 36 225.7  
77.0 15 110.9 26 162.2 37 229.1  
79.7 16 114.8 27 167.9 38 233.6  
82.5 17 118.8 28 173.8 39 241.8  
85.4 18 123.0 29 179.9 40 250.3  
88.5 19 127.3 30 186.2 41 254.1  
91.5 20 131.8 31 192.8 42 1750  
◆
To check the tone frequency stored in a memory channel,  
recall the desired memory channel and press [AGC/T  
(SEL)].  
TRANSMITTING A TONE  
In general, FM repeaters require the transceiver to  
transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other repeaters  
on the same frequency from locking each other up.  
The required tone frequency differs among repeaters.  
Repeaters also differ in their requirements for either  
continuous or burst tones. For the appropriate  
selections for your accessible repeaters, consult your  
local repeater reference.  
94.8 21 136.5 32 203.5 --  
--  
Note:  
◆
After completing the tone settings, pressing and  
holding Mic [PTT] causes the transceiver to transmit  
the selected tone. If you have selected a 1750 Hz  
tone, the transceiver sends a 500 ms tone burst each  
time transmission starts.  
You can select a tone frequency independent of a  
CTCSS frequency.  
◆
When 1750 Hz is selected, the transceiver sends a  
500 ms tone burst each time transmission starts. You  
cannot transmit 1750 Hz tone manually.  
Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need  
not reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES”  
{page 43}.  
TONE FREQUENCY ID SCAN  
This function scans through all tone frequencies to  
identify the incoming tone frequency on a received  
signal. You may find this useful when you do not know  
the tone frequency that the repeater uses.  
■ Activating the Tone Function  
1 Confirm that FM mode has been selected on  
the VFO(s) {page 10}.  
•
When using 2 VFOs, you must select FM  
mode on both VFOs.  
1 While the Tone function is ON (“ ” is visible), press  
and hold [AGC/T (SEL)].  
•
The current tone frequency appears.  
2 Press [AGC/T (SEL)].  
“ ” appears.  
•
2 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to activate the Tone  
frequency ID scan.  
•
While the transceiver is receiving a signal, “ ”  
blinks and every tone frequency is scanned.  
When the tone frequency is identified, the  
transceiver stops scanning and the identified  
frequency is displayed.  
Note: You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS  
function.  
■ Selecting a Tone Frequency  
1 While “ ” appears (Tone function is ON), press  
and hold [AGC/T (SEL)].  
•
•
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to stop  
scanning while the tone frequency ID scan is  
active.  
•
The current tone frequency appears.  
The default is 88.5 Hz.  
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] again to resume  
scanning.  
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in  
progress.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired  
tone frequency.  
•
The available tone frequencies are listed in  
the table below.  
3 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR]  
to complete the setting.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS 6  
FM CTCSS OPERATION  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
No.  
You may sometimes want to hear calls only from  
specific persons. When using FM mode, the  
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)  
allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from  
other persons who are using the same frequency.  
A CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from  
among the 42 tone frequencies. Select the same  
CTCSS tone as the other stations in your group. You  
will not hear calls from stations other than those using  
the same CTCSS tone.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
67.0 11  
97.4 22 141.3 33 206.5  
69.3 12 100.0 23 146.2 34 210.7  
71.9 13 103.5 24 151.4 35 218.1  
74.4 14 107.2 25 156.7 36 225.7  
77.0 15 110.9 26 162.2 37 229.1  
79.7 16 114.8 27 167.9 38 233.6  
82.5 17 118.8 28 173.8 39 241.8  
85.4 18 123.0 29 179.9 40 250.3  
88.5 19 127.3 30 186.2 41 254.1  
Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private.  
It only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
91.5 20 131.8 31 192.8 --  
94.8 21 136.5 32 203.5 --  
--  
--  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
2 Select the 29 MHz band or the 51-54 MHz band  
You will hear calls only when the selected tone is  
received. To answer the call, press and hold Mic  
[PTT], then speak into the microphone.  
using [28 (9)] or [50 (0)].  
3 Select the desired frequency with the Tuning  
control or MULTI/CH control.  
Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed  
the appropriate CTCSS frequency.  
4 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM mode.  
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.  
6 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on  
both VFOs to use CTCSS.  
You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone  
frequency.  
You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone function.  
7 While “ ” is visible, press and hold [AGC/T  
(SEL)].  
CTCSS FREQUENCY ID SCAN  
•
The current CTCSS frequency appears (default  
is 88.5 Hz).  
This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to  
identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received  
signal. You may find this useful when you cannot  
recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in  
your group are using.  
1 While the CTCSS function is ON, press and hold  
8 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the  
[AGC/T (SEL)].  
appropriate CTCSS frequency.  
•
The current CTCSS frequency appears.  
•
The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in  
the table below.  
2 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to activate the CTCSS  
frequency ID scan.  
9 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR] to  
complete the setting.  
•
While the transceiver is receiving a signal, “  
”
blinks and every CTCSS frequency is scanned.  
When the CTCSS frequency is identified, the  
transceiver stops scanning and the identified  
frequency is displayed.  
•
•
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to stop  
scanning while the CTCSS frequency ID scan is  
active.  
Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] again to resume  
scanning.  
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in  
progress.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS  
CROSS TONE  
Use this feature when using different uplink and  
downlink tones to access a repeater. You can set a  
transmission Tone frequency and reception CTCSS  
frequency to different frequencies.  
To set the transmission tone:  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
2 Select your desired transmission frequency.  
3 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM.  
4 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
5 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)], then turn the  
MULTI/CH control to select your desired Tone  
frequency.  
6 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR] to  
complete the setting.  
To set the reception tone:  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select the other VFO.  
2 Select your desired reception frequency.  
3 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] to select FM.  
4 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
5 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)], then turn the  
MULTI/CH control to select your desired CTCSS  
frequency.  
6 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] or press [CLR] to  
complete the setting.  
To set the Cross tone:  
1 Press [SPLIT].  
•
“SPLIT” appears on the display.  
2 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] until “ ” appears.  
Note: hen the cross tone function is ON, the Tone and CTCSS  
frequency cannot be changed. To change the Tone or CTCSS  
frequency, press [AGC/T (SEL)] to turn Tone or CTCSS ON,  
then change the setting.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
RECEPTION  
Note: When entering a frequency using the numeric keys, if  
you turn the MULTI/CH control in the middle of the frequency  
entry, the frequency will be entered into the log.  
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY  
■ Using the MHz key  
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing  
Mic [UP]/ [DWN], there are several other ways  
to select your frequency. This section describes  
additional methods of frequency selection that may  
save you time and effort.  
You can use the MULTI/CH control to change the  
operating frequency in steps of 1 MHz.  
1 Press [MHz].  
•
“
” appears.  
■ Direct Frequency Entry  
When the desired frequency is far removed from  
the current frequency, directly entering a frequency  
from the numeric keypad is usually the fastest  
method.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control.  
•
Clockwise increases the frequency and  
counter-clockwise decreases the frequency.  
1 Press [ENT].  
•
“ - - . - - - . - - ” appears.  
3 Press [MHz] again to exit.  
” disappears.  
•
“
If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of  
100 kHz or 500 kHz, rather than 1 MHz, access  
Menu No. 12 and select 100 kHz, 500 kHz, or  
1 MHz.  
2 Press the numeric keys ([50 (0)] to [28 (9)]) to  
enter your desired frequency.  
•
Pressing [ENT] at any time fills the  
remaining digits (the digits you did not enter)  
with 0 and completes the entry.  
Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is assigned for the [MHz]  
key, “  
” appears on the display.  
To select 1.85 MHz for example, press  
[ENT], [50 (0)], [1.8 (1)], [24 (8)], [14 (5)],  
then press [ENT] to complete the input (6  
key strokes).  
■ Quick QSY  
To move up or down the frequency quickly, use  
the MULTI/CH control. The default values are as  
follows: SSB/AM mode: 5 kHz, CW/FSK mode:  
500 Hz, FM mode: 10 kHz  
•
Pressing [CLR] before pressing [ENT]  
cancels the entry and restores the current  
VFO frequency.  
•
If you want to change the default frequency step  
size, access Menu No. 16 (SSB), 17 (CW/FSK),  
18 (AM), or 19 (FM). Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.  
SEL)] to select OFF, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5  
kHz, or 10 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK, and 5 kHz,  
6.25 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25  
kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz, or 100 kHz for AM/ FM.  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
You can enter a frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz  
to 59.999.99 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the  
available frequency range.  
Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the  
selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound  
and the entered frequency is rejected.  
When the entered frequency does not meet the current  
VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest  
available frequency is automatically selected after the  
entered frequency is changed.  
When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered,  
the digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit,  
and frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not  
displayed.  
•
•
When changing the operating frequency by  
using the MULTI/CH control, frequencies  
are rounded such that new frequencies are  
multiples of the frequency step size. To disable  
this function, access Menu No. 14 and select  
“oFF” (default is ON).  
◆
◆
In the AM broadcast band the step size will  
automatically be set to 9 kHz when Menu No.  
15 is ON.  
When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will  
be switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is  
not cleared.  
Note:  
■ Frequency Entry History  
◆
You can also set a different frequency step size for SSB,  
CW/FSK, AM and FM modes.  
The last 10 frequencies you entered are stored in  
the Frequency Entry History. You can access the  
history to easily re-enter a recently used frequency.  
◆
When the menu is set to “oFF”, the MULTI/CH control is  
invalid in each mode.  
1 Press [ENT].  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control.  
•
The entered frequency along with its log  
number appears. The most recent entered  
frequency is logged as number E0 and the  
oldest frequency is logged as number E9.  
3 Press [ENT] to set the selected frequency to  
the VFO.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
■ Fine Tuning  
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)  
The default frequency step size when turning the  
Tuning control to change the frequency is 10  
Hz for SSB/ CW/ FSK, and 100 Hz for AM/ FM.  
However, you can change the frequency step size  
to 1 Hz for SSB/ CW/ FSK, and 10 Hz for AM/ FM.  
RIT provides the ability to change your reception  
frequency by 9.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without  
changing your transmission frequency. If the Fine  
Tuning ([FINE (F.LOCK)]) function is ON, the  
frequency step size becomes 1 Hz ( 9.999 kHz). RIT  
works equally well with all modulation modes and  
while using VFO or Memory Recall mode.  
1 Press [FINE (F.LOCK)].  
•
“
” appears.  
1 Press [RIT].  
•
“
” and the RIT offset appear.  
2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact  
frequency.  
2 If required, press [CL] to reset the RIT offset to 0.  
3 To quit the function, press [FINE (F.LOCK)]  
again.  
3 Turn the RIT/ XIT control to change your reception  
frequency.  
•
“
” disappears.  
4 To turn RIT OFF, press [RIT].  
Note:  
◆
If the Fine Tuning function is ON when the displayed  
frequency is less than 1MHz, the frequency is displayed  
up to the 1Hz digit but is shifted one position to the left  
(except when Menu No. 56 is set to “1” or ”2”).  
•
The reception frequency is returned to the  
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.  
Note: When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with  
the RIT function ON, the RIT offset frequency is added to or  
subtracted from the VFO frequency. The calculated data is then  
stored in the Memory channel.  
◆
The Fine Tuning function ON/OFF setting is stored in  
each of the following modes.  
SSB/ SSB-DATA/ CW/ FSK/ FM/ AM  
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)  
■ Tuning Control Adjustment Rate  
When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the  
time constant for the Automatic Gain Control circuit.  
The default Tuning control adjustment rate is 1000.  
This represents the number of pulses the Tuning  
control generates in a complete revolution. Each  
pulse changes the tuning frequency based on the  
current frequency step size (the frequency step  
size for the Tuning control is 10 Hz for SSB/ CW/  
FSK and 100 Hz for AM/ FM). For example, in  
SSB mode the frequency step size is 10 Hz, so the  
frequency would change by 5,000 Hz in a complete  
revolution of the Tuning control. The adjustment  
rate of the Tuning control can be lowered to 250  
pulses per revolution or increased to 1000 pulses  
per revolution.  
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver  
gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large  
input changes. A fast time constant causes the  
receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to  
changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is  
particularly useful in the following situations:  
•
•
•
Tuning rapidly  
Receiving weak signals  
Receiving high-speed CW  
For your convenience, the following default AGC time  
constant has already been programmed.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
13.  
SSB/SSB-DATA: Slow (“  
FSK: Fast (“ ”)  
”) CW: Fast (“  
”)  
”)  
AM/AM-DATA: Slow (“  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “250”,  
“500”, or “1000” (default).  
■ AGC Time Constant Adjustment  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
You can pre-set up to 20 values (1 ~ 20) for the  
FAST/SLOW time constant (release time).  
■ Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)  
This function allows you to copy the frequency and  
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive  
VFO.  
To change the default time constant:  
1 Press [AGC/T (SEL)] to select FAST or SLOW.  
The AGC time constant icon appears on the  
display (“ ”: Slow, “ ”: Fast).  
•
1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or  
VFO B.  
2 Press and hold [AGC/T (SEL)] to display the  
2 Press and hold [A/B (A=B)].  
time constant pre-set value.  
•
The frequency and mode selected in step 1  
are duplicated to the inactive VFO.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to set your desired  
time constant value.  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to confirm that the frequency  
4 If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press and hold  
was copied to other VFO.  
[CW T. (AGC OFF)].  
•
“
” appears on the display.  
Note: You cannot adjust the time constant in FM mode.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMUNICATING AIDS 7  
■ Delay Time  
TRANSMISSION  
If the transceiver returns to reception mode too  
quickly after you stop speaking, your final word  
may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an  
appropriate delay time that allows all of your words  
to be transmitted without an overly long delay after  
you stop speaking.  
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMISSION)  
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching  
to the transmission mode each time you want to  
transmit. The transceiver automatically switches to  
transmission mode when VOX senses that you have  
begun speaking into the microphone.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing  
between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop  
back to reception mode briefly. You will then hear if  
anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short  
period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.  
Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as  
well as respect your more articulate conversation.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)] to switch the VOX function ON.  
•
“
” appears.  
3 Press and hold [KEY (DELAY)].  
•
The current setting appears on the  
sub-display. The default is 50 (1500 ms).  
Press [VOX (LEV)] to toggle between VOX ON and  
OFF.  
•
“
” appears when the VOX function is ON.  
4 While speaking into the microphone using your  
normal tone of voice, turn the MULTI/CH control  
such that the transceiver switches to reception  
mode after you have stopped talking.  
•
The selectable range is from 5 to 100  
(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.  
■ Microphone Input Level  
5 Press [CLR] to store the parameter and exit the  
To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to  
properly adjust the VOX gain. This level controls  
the capability of VOX to detect the presence or  
absence of your voice.  
setting mode.  
■ Anti-VOX Adjustment  
In CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.  
The TS-590SG transceiver has a DSP IC to  
improve and customize incoming/ outgoing audio  
signals. When the VOX function is turned ON, the  
DSP IC adjusts the Anti-VOX level automatically,  
comparing the reception sound level and  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)] to switch the VOX function  
ON.  
microphone input level. So, you never have to  
worry about adjusting the anti-VOX level.  
•
“
” appears.  
Note: When connecting a headphone to the Phone jack,  
Anti-VOX will not function.  
■ Data VOX  
3 Press and hold [VOX (LEV)].  
Although the microphone is normally used for  
VOX transmission, you can also utilize the audio  
input of the ACC2 or USB connector. When the  
transceiver detects an audio signal on the ACC2 or  
USB connector, it automatically transmits. You can  
select ACC2 or USB via Menu No. 69 (“Selecting a  
Data Transmission Line”) {page 61}.  
•
The current VOX gain level appears on the  
sub-display.  
4 While speaking into the microphone using  
your normal tone of voice, adjust the setting  
(default is 4) using the MULTI/CH control until  
the transceiver reliably switches to transmission  
mode each time you speak.  
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
76.  
•
•
The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.  
3 Press [M.IN] to set the VOX with DATA input  
The setting should not allow background  
noise to switch the transceiver to transmit  
mode.  
function ON.  
4 If necessary, adjust the VOX gain level for the  
ACC2 or USB connector {page 32}.  
Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is  
switched OFF or while you are transmitting.  
Note: While VOX with DATA input is set to ON (Menu No.  
76), speaking into the microphone also activates the VOX  
function and you can still transmit using Mic [PTT]. Anti-VOX  
does not function with Data VOX.  
While the Data VOX function remains ON and the transceiver  
is connected to a sound source, such as a PC, the  
transceiver may begin transmitting due to the sounds  
emitted from the sound source. To avoid unintended  
transmission while the transceiver is connected to the  
sound source, turn the Data VOX function OFF.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
•
Using higher compression will not improve  
your signal clarity or apparent signal strength.  
Excessively compressed signals are more  
difficult to understand due to distortion and are  
less pleasant to hear than signals with less  
compression.  
■ Data VOX Delay Time  
Select an appropriate delay time for after the audio  
signal input to the ACC2 or USB connector ends.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 77.  
5 Press and hold [PROC (LEV)] to exit the Speech  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to set your  
Processor input level adjustment mode.  
desired delay time.  
6 Press [MIC (CAR)] to enter the Speech Processor  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
output level adjustment mode.  
■ USB/ ACC2 VOX Gain  
•
As you speak into the microphone, turn the  
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter  
reflects according to your voice level, but does  
not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC (CAR)] to  
exit when you finish the adjustment.  
When using the ACC2 or USB connector for VOX  
transmission, take the time to properly adjust the  
VOX gain.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR]  
or turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu  
No. 78 (USB connector) or Menu No. 79 (ACC2  
connector).  
Note: The Speech Processor ON/OFF are stored in each of the  
following modes.  
SSB/ SSB-DATA/ CW/ FSK / FM/FM-DATA/ AM/ AM–DATA  
■ Speech Processor Effect  
2 While sending an audio signal to the ACC2 or  
USB connector, adjust the value (default is 4)  
using [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] until the  
transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode  
each time you send an audio signal to the  
connector.  
When using the Speech Processor, you can  
change its effect.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
35.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to set the  
Processor Effect to SOFT or HARD (default).  
SPEECH PROCESSOR  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in  
your voice while you speak. When using SSB, AM, or  
FM mode, this leveling action effectively raises  
the average TX power (SSB/AM) or raises the  
deviation to an adequate level (FM), resulting in a  
more understandable signal. The amount of voice  
compression is fully adjustable. Using the Speech  
Processor makes it easier to be heard by distant  
stations.  
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)  
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your  
transmission frequency by 9.99 kHz in steps of  
10 Hz without changing your reception frequency. If  
the Fine Tuning function is ON, the frequency step  
size becomes 1 Hz ( 9.999 kHz).  
Level  
1 Press [XIT].  
•
“
” and the XIT offset appear.  
Speech  
Processor  
OFF  
Time  
2 If required, press [CL] to reset the XIT offset to 0.  
Level  
3 Turn the RIT/ XIT control to change your transmit  
frequency.  
Time  
Speech  
Processor  
ON  
4 To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT].  
1 Select USB, LSB, AM, or FM mode.  
•
“
” and the offset frequency disappear. The  
transmission frequency is returned to the  
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.  
2 Press [PROC (LEV)] to turn the Speech Processor  
ON.  
Note:  
◆
•
“
” appears.  
The frequency shift set by the XIT control is also used by the  
RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset  
also affects the RIT offset.  
3 Press and hold [PROC (LEV)] to enter the Speech  
Processor input level adjustment mode.  
◆
When the XIT frequency goes beyond the available  
transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops  
transmitting.  
4 As you speak into the microphone, turn the  
MULTI/CH control so that the compression meter  
indicates that the compression level is around  
10 dB while you speak.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMUNICATING AIDS 7  
Frequency Response Curves  
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMISSION SIGNAL  
CHARACTERISTICS  
The quality of your transmission signal is important,  
regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.  
However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact  
since you don’t listen to your own signal.  
oFF  
Amplitude  
Hb2  
HP  
bb1  
c
The following sub-sections provide information that will  
help you tailor your transmission signal.  
0.1  
1.0  
2.0  
Audio frequency (kHz)  
■ TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM)  
Use Menu No. 31 to select one of the following TX  
low-cut filters: 10, 100, 200, 300 (default), 400, or  
500 Hz.  
Note:  
◆
When using the ARCP-590G, you can temporarily change  
each preset value.  
◆
The TX Equalizer properties are stored in each of the  
following modes.  
SSB/ SSB-DATA/ CW/ FSK / FM/FM-DATA/ AM/ AM–DATA  
Use Menu No. 32 to select one of the following TX  
high-cut filters: 2500, 2600, 2700 (default), 2800,  
2900, or 3000 Hz.  
TRANSMIT INHIBIT  
■ TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB-DATA)  
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being  
placed in transmission mode. No signal can be  
transmitted when this function is ON, even if Mic [PTT]  
is pressed.  
Use Menu No. 33 to select one of the following TX  
low-cut filters: 10, 100, 200, 300 (default), 400, or  
500 Hz.  
Use Menu No. 34 to select one of the following TX  
high-cut filters: 2500, 2600, 2700 (default), 2800,  
2900, or 3000 Hz.  
•
•
TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.  
TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.  
Switch this function ON or OFF via Menu No. 66.  
The default is OFF.  
■ TX Equalizer (SSB/ SSB-DATA / FM/ FM-DATA/ AM/  
AM-DATA)  
BUSY LOCKOUT  
Use Menu No. 36 to change the transmission  
frequency characteristics of your signal. You can  
select from 1 of 6 different transmission profiles  
including the default flat response. Selecting any  
of the following items from the Menu causes  
Busy Lockout prevents the transceiver from being  
placed in transmit mode if the current operating  
frequency is busy; in other words, if the squelch is  
open, you cannot transmit.  
“
” to appear on the display.  
•
•
Busy Lockout OFF: Transmission is allowed.  
•
Off (oFF):  
Busy Lockout ON: Transmission is not allowed.  
The flat frequency response (default).  
Switch this function ON or OFF via Menu No. 81.  
The default is OFF.  
•
•
•
High boost 1 (Hb1)/ High boost 2 (Hb2):  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective  
for a bassi voice. High boost 2 does not reduce  
the low frequency as much as High boost 1.  
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING  
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually an  
unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with other  
stations. However, if necessary, by using the Tuning  
control you can change the operating frequency while  
transmitting. You also can change the XIT offset  
frequency while in transmission mode.  
Formant pass (FP):  
Improves clarity by suppressing audio  
frequencies outside the normal voice frequency  
range.  
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside  
the transmission frequency range, the transceiver is  
automatically forced to return to reception mode.  
Bass boost 1 (bb1)/ Bass boost 2 (bb2):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies;  
effective for a voice with more high frequency  
components. Bass boost 2 emphasizes more  
low frequency response.  
•
•
Conventional (c):  
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and  
higher.  
User (U):  
Reserved for the optional ARCP software.  
Off (oFF) is programmed at the factory as a  
default.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
CW BREAK-IN  
ELECTRONIC KEYER  
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually  
switching between transmission and reception modes.  
Two types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in  
and Full Break-in.  
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that  
can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the  
transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys for CW  
(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 2} for details regarding  
this connection. The built-in keyer supports lambic  
(squeeze) operation.  
Semi Break-in:  
When the key contacts open, the transceiver  
automatically waits for the duration of the time  
period you selected. The transceiver then returns to  
reception mode.  
ELECTRONIC KEYER MODE  
There are 2 modes of operation when using an  
electronic keyer for lambic keying operation. Mode A  
completes the current key sequence you are sending  
when you release the paddles. Mode B sends one  
more key, opposite the current key you are sending,  
upon releasing the paddles.  
Full Break-in:  
As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver  
returns to reception mode.  
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW mode.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 38.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)].  
” appears.  
3 Press and hold [KEY (DELAY)].  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “A” or “B”  
(default).  
•
“
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
CHANGING KEYING SPEED  
•
The current setting (FBK or delay time) appears.  
The default is 50 (500 ms).  
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully  
adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is  
important in order to send error-free CW that other  
operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is  
beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.  
You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed  
that is close to the speed used by the other station.  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select “FBK” (Full  
Break-in) or a delay time for Semi Break-in.  
•
Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to  
1000 ms) in steps of 5.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 Press [KEY (DELAY)].  
•
The current keying speed appears. The default  
is 20 (wpm).  
5 Begin sending.  
•
The transceiver automatically switches to  
transmission mode.  
•
When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected:  
The transceiver immediately switches to  
reception mode when the key opens.  
3 While keying the paddle and listening to the TX  
(transmission) sidetone, turn the MULTI/CH control  
to select the appropriate speed.  
•
When a delay time is selected:  
The transceiver switches to reception mode  
after the delay time that you have selected has  
passed.  
•
The speeds range from 4 to 60 wpm, in steps of  
1 wpm. The larger the number, the faster the  
speed.  
4 Press [KEY (DELAY)] again to complete the  
6 Press [CLR] to exit.  
setting.  
Note: FBK (Full Break-in) cannot be used with the TL-922/  
922A linear amplifier.  
Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the  
selected speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.  
■ Invalid Break-In Operation  
You can make break-in operation invalid while  
performing the keying speed adjustment.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 49,  
and select “on” (default is “oFF”).  
•
“VOX” blinks when break-in operation is  
enabled.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMUNICATING AIDS 7  
CW MESSAGE MEMORY  
RISE TIME OF CW  
The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF  
output to rise to its maximum power after the key is  
closed.  
This transceiver has 4 memory channels for storing  
CW messages. Each memory channel can store  
approximately 50 characters (equivalent of 250 dots).  
These memory channels are ideal for storing contest  
exchanges that you want to send repeatedly. Stored  
messages can be played back to check message  
content or for transmitting.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 41.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1”, “2”,  
“4”, or “6” (default).  
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you  
to interrupt playback and manually inject your own  
keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu  
No. 39 and select “on”. The default is OFF.  
•
The default setting of 6 ms is fine for slow or  
medium keying speeds and normal weighting  
(dot/ dash ratio). 1, 2, or 4 ms are good for  
faster keying speeds.  
The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back the  
message that you stored. To switch this function ON,  
access Menu No. 62 and select “on”. The default is  
OFF.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
AUTO WEIGHTING  
For repetitive message playback, you can change  
the interval between each series of messages. Use  
Menu No. 63 and select the time in the range of 0 to  
60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.  
The electronic keyer can automatically change the dot/  
dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash length  
to dot length. The weighting changes with your keying  
speed automatically, thus making your keying easier  
for other operators to copy (default).  
Note:  
◆
◆
This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is  
ON.  
Access Menu No. 42 to select “AUto” or “2.5” ~ “4.0”  
(in steps of 0.1) fixed weight ratio. The default is  
“auto”. When a fixed weight ratio is selected, the dot/  
dash weight ratio is locked, irregardless of the keying  
speed.  
Operating the keyer paddle while Menu No. 39 is OFF,  
cancels message playback. Even if message playback does  
not stop because of your keying start timing, you can cancel  
playback by pressing [CLR].  
◆
When the constant recording function of the optional VGS-1  
is ON, you cannot use [RX/4 (REC)].  
■ Reverse Keying Weight Ratio  
■ Storing CW Messages  
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as  
you increase your keying speed. However, the  
electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting  
as you increase your keying speed.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW  
mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 43,  
and select “on”. The default is OFF.  
2 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)],  
[CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select a  
memory channel to be recorded.  
When setting Menu No. 42 to “Auto”, refer to the  
following.  
Reverse  
Keying  
Weight  
Keying Speed (wpm)  
4 ~ 24  
25 ~ 44  
1:3.0  
45 ~ 60  
•
If Constant Recording is ON (Menu No.  
61), you cannot store a message to [RX/4  
(REC)] {page 63}. The default is ON.  
OFF  
ON  
1:2.8  
1:3.2  
1:3.2  
1:2.8  
1:3.0  
3 Begin sending using the keyer paddle.  
The message you send is stored in memory.  
•
BUG KEY FUNCTION  
The built-in electronic keyer can also be used as a  
semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also  
known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are  
generated in the normal manner by the electronic  
keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by  
the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for the  
appropriate length of time.  
4 To complete the message storage, press [CLR]  
or [CH1 (REC)]/ [CH2 (REC)]/ [CH3 (REC)]/  
[RX/4 (REC)] to stop.  
•
When the number reaches 100(%), the  
memory becomes full and recording  
automatically stops.  
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 44 and  
select “on”. The default is OFF.  
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory  
(see below) cannot be used.  
Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to  
record a message, a pause is stored in the channel.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
■ Checking CW Messages without Transmitting  
■ Erasing a CW Message  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW  
1 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)],  
[CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select the  
message you want to erase.  
mode.  
•
“CW” appears.  
•
“CP n – –” appears, where “n” represents the  
channel number.  
2 If Break-in is ON, press [VOX (LEV)] to turn  
VOX OFF.  
2 To erase the CW message, press [CLR] while  
continuing to hold the same key as in step 1  
([CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or  
[RX/4 (REC)]).  
3 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select the channel  
to be played back.  
•
•
The message is played back.  
•
A beep sounds and the message is erased.  
When Menu No. 62 is “oFF”, press and  
hold the current playback channel key to  
repeatedly play back the message saved  
to that key (a display such as “CP 1111”  
appears for the channel key you pressed.).  
To cancel the playback, press any channel  
key or [CLR].  
■ Changing the Inter-message Interval Time  
For the message playback repeat, access Menu  
No. 62 and select “on”. You can also change the  
interval playback time of the message. Access  
Menu No. 63 and select the time in the range of 0  
to 60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.  
•
To play back the messages stored in the  
other channels in sequence, press the  
corresponding channel keys during playback.  
Up to 4 channels can be queued at the  
same time. (Repeat playback, by pressing  
and holding the keys, does not work during  
consecutive message playback.)  
Note: Menu Nos. 56 and 57 settings are shared with the  
voice communication modes when the optional VGS-1 is  
installed.  
■ Changing the CW Sidetone Volume  
Turning the AF control does not change the CW  
sidetone playback volume. To change the CW  
sidetone volume, access Menu No. 06 and select  
“oFF”, or “1” to “20”. The default is “10”.  
■ Insert Keying  
•
•
While playing back the messages, you can  
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing  
[KEY (DELAY)] and turning the MULTI/CH  
control.  
If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing  
back a recorded CW message, the transceiver  
stops playing back the message. However, during  
contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes  
want to insert a different number or message at a  
certain point in the recorded message.  
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].  
■ Transmitting CW Messages  
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-in/  
Full Break-in or manual TX/ RX switching.  
In this case, first record the CW message as  
usual {page 35}, without the additional number or  
message you want to insert. Then, access Menu  
No. 39 and select “on”.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW  
mode.  
Now, if you operate a CW keyer while you play  
back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses  
the playback of the recorded message, instead of  
stopping it. When you finish sending the number or  
message with the keyer, the transceiver resumes  
playback of the message.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press  
[VOX (LEV)].  
•
•
“
” appears.  
If you are not using Semi Break-in/ Full  
Break-in, press [SEND].  
3 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] select the channel to  
be played back.  
•
The message is played back and transmitted  
automatically.  
•
To transmit the messages stored in the  
other channels in sequence, press the  
corresponding channel keys during playback.  
Up to 4 channels can be queued at the  
same time.  
•
•
While playing back the messages, you can  
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing  
[KEY (DELAY)] and turning the MULTI/CH  
control.  
To cancel transmission, press [CLR].  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMUNICATING AIDS 7  
SWAP DOT AND DASH PADDLE POSITIONS  
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW  
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would  
sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to  
watch and listen to CW signals. It is fine just to  
monitor those CW signals but you have experienced  
that changing the mode from SSB to CW results in  
losing the target CW signal. This is because the  
frequency on the display always shows the true carrier  
frequency for all modes. If you want the transceiver to  
shift the reception frequency to trace the receiving CW  
signal when changing the mode from SSB (USB or  
LSB) to CW, switch this function ON. The transceiver  
shifts the reception frequency when changing the  
mode from SSB to CW, so you can still hear the target  
signal and instantly transmit the signal in CW without  
adjusting the frequency.  
This function reverses the position of the dot and dash  
paddle positions. As a default, the left paddle sends  
dots and the right paddle sends dashes. When this  
function is ON, the left paddle will send dashes and  
the right paddle will send dots.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 45.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
•
The left paddle now sends dashes and the right  
paddle now sends dots. To return to the normal  
paddle positions, access Menu No. 45 and  
select “oFF”.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 48.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE  
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can  
configure the transceiver to change the operating  
mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then  
transmit in CW mode automatically when you operate  
the CW keyers.  
The mode automatically changes from USB to CW  
and LSB to CWR, regardless of the setting for Menu  
No. 42 (Frequency correction for changing SSB to  
CW). Therefore, when the CW signal is received in  
SSB mode, you can operate the paddle or keyer to  
immediately communicate CW with another station.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 47.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
Note: You must switch the CW Break-in function ON to change  
the mode and transmit in CW mode {page 34}.  
MIC UP/ DWN KEY PADDLE MODE  
This function allows you to send CW messages  
without using an optional paddle {page 2}. The Mic  
[UP] key can be used as the dot paddle and the Mic  
[DWN] key can be used as the dash paddle.  
To activate Mic UP/ DWN key Paddle mode:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 46.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “PA”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
•
Press and hold Mic [DWN] to send dots or Mic  
[UP] to send dashes in CW mode.  
4 To exit Mic UP/ DWN key Paddle mode, access  
Menu No. 46 and select “PF”.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 COMMUNICATING AIDS  
Note:  
MORSE CODE DECODER  
The decoded character strings are displayed on the  
sub-display (up to 8 characters) by decoding the  
received Morse code.  
◆
◆
◆
The keying speeds range from 4 to 60 wpm.  
The weighting ranges from 2.5 (1:2.5) to 4.0 (1:4.0).  
There are eight corresponding abbreviations: BT, AR, AS,  
HH, SK, KN, BK, and SN.  
◆
◆
The split-frequency and RIT/XIT frequency are not displayed  
during this function.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until you select CW mode.  
The setting mode is displayed by priority in setting modes.  
When the setting modes are finished, the most recent  
decoded character strings are displayed.  
•
“CW” appears.  
2 Press [DATA] to toggle the Morse Code Decoder  
ON and OFF.  
◆
◆
Depending on radio wave conditions (noise, fading, signal  
interference, etc.), decoding may not be performed correctly.  
•
•
“
” appears when the Morse Code Decoder  
If the keying speed of the target signal changes during  
reception, the character immediately before and after the  
changed speed will not be decoded correctly.  
is ON.  
Whenever one character is decoded, the  
character is displayed from the right end in Sub-  
display.  
◆
◆
Characters that cannot be decoded are displayed as  
underscores.  
Available alphanumeric characters that can be displayed are  
listed below.  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T  
U V W X Y Z / @ ?.  
◆
◆
The number 0 is displayed by entering a slash.  
This function does not work with message playback that is  
recorded.  
THRESHOLD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT  
Adjust the threshold level in order to reduce the  
influence of the signal strength and external noise,  
adjust the threshold level.  
1 With the Morse code decoder ON, press and hold  
[DATA].  
•
Threshold Level Setting mode starts. “  
blink and the current number display and meter  
display levels will blink.  
” will  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to set the threshold  
level.  
•
Adjust the threshold from 1 to 10 for weak  
signals in which the S-meter does not show any  
deflection.  
•
Adjust the threshold from 11 to 30 for strong  
signals in which the S-meter deflects the  
needle.  
3 Press [DATA (REV)] or [CLR] to exit the threshold  
level adjustment mode.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS  
RADIO TELETYPE (RTTY)  
RTTY is the data communications mode with the  
longest history. It was originally designed for use with  
mechanical teletypewriters which were often used  
7 You can switch to transmit mode by entering a  
command from the computer to the RTTY device.  
•
The TX-RX LED changes from green (RX) to  
red (TX).  
before personal computers became common. Now  
you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal  
computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you  
type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you  
type is transmitted and displayed on the computer  
screen of the recipient.  
8 Begin sending data from your computer.  
•
Press and hold [PWR (TX MONI)] to monitor  
your signals. Press and hold [PWR (TX MONI)]  
again to quit this function.  
9 When finished transmitting, enter a command from  
your computer to return to reception mode.  
RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)  
and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to  
transmit information.  
•
The TX-RX LED changes from red (TX) to  
green (RX).  
The following frequencies (measured in kHz) are  
commonly used for RTTY operation:  
For cable connections, refer to “CONNECTING TO  
RTTY EQUIPMENT (FSK)” {page 72}.  
For further information, consult reference books about  
Amateur Radio.  
IARU Region 1  
U.S.A./ Canada  
(Europe/ Africa)  
1 Access Menu No. 50 and select an FSK shift.  
1800 ~ 1840  
3605 ~ 3645 (DX: 3590)  
7080 ~ 7100 (DX: 7040)  
10140 ~ 10150  
1838 ~ 1842  
3580 ~ 3620  
•
FSK shift is the difference in frequencies  
between a mark and a space.  
7035 ~ 7045  
•
The 170 Hz shift (default) is normally used on  
the Amateur bands for the RTTY.  
10140 ~ 10150  
14080 ~ 14099.5  
18101 ~ 18109  
21080 ~ 21120  
22920 ~ 24929  
28050 ~ 28150  
14070 ~ 14099.5  
18100 ~ 18110  
2 Access Menu No. 51 and select a key-down  
polarity.  
•
Select “oFF” (default) to transmit a mark when  
keying down or “on” to transmit a space.  
21070 ~ 21100  
24920 ~ 24930  
3 Access Menu No. 52 and select “2125” (high tone)  
28070 ~ 28150  
or “1275” (low tone) for mark.  
•
High tone (default) is commonly used  
nowadays.  
PHASE-SHIFT KEYING 31 BAUD (PSK31)  
4 Select an operating frequency.  
PSK31 is a digital modulation method used in  
5 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] to select FSK mode.  
amateur radio communications. You can perform data  
communications in real-time using a keyboard, like  
RTTY. Additionally, because of the narrow bandwidth  
(31.25 Hz) you can even use PSK31 on congested  
frequencies. Another merit to PSK31 is that it can be  
enjoyed with a simple antenna and low transmit power.  
•
“FSK” appears.  
•
If necessary, access Menu No. 74 to configure  
the appropriate audio output level for your  
MCP. The audio output level of ANO (ACC2  
connector/ pin 3) changes {page 69}. The AF  
control cannot be used to adjust the audio level  
for your MCP.  
Using the sound function of your PC along with  
PSK31 software, many amateur radio operators enjoy  
PSK31.  
•
Refer to “CONNECTING TO DATA  
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT” {page 71} for  
connections.  
6 Some stations may be operating in Reverse shift.  
In this case, press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)] to  
reverse the shift (the upper sideband is used).  
•
When managing PSK31 using the sound capability  
of a PC, use SSB mode.  
•
•
•
Set AGC to fast.  
•
“FSR” appears.  
Turn off the speech processor.  
Refer to “EXTERNAL AUDIO SETTINGS”  
{page 61} for Audio Settings.  
For further information, consult reference books about  
Amateur Radio.  
•
Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for FSK  
operation. Press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)]  
again to return to the lower sideband. “FSK”  
appears.  
Note: When changing FSK/ FSK-R, the receiving polarity  
is reversed (a mark signal and a space signal interchange).  
Transmitting polarity is not reversed.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
■ CW/ FSK Mode (Width/Shift)  
DSP FILTERS  
KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP)  
1 Select CW or FSK mode.  
technology is adapted to this transceiver. Using DSP  
filtering (AF), you can control the bandwidth, cancel  
the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the noise level.  
2 Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise  
to increase the bandwidth (wide), or  
counterclockwise to decrease the bandwidth  
(narrow).  
CHANGING THE DSP FILTER BANDWIDTH  
Desired signal  
Interfering  
signal  
For improving interference reduction capability, this  
transceiver also provides IF filters designed using  
DSP technology. To change the passband of the filter,  
you can use the method of changing the high and  
low cut-off frequency (HI/LOW cut), or you can use  
the method of changing the bandwidth and center  
frequency (WIDTH/SHIFT). Changing the IF filter  
does not affect the current receive frequency.  
Interfering  
signal  
Before  
After  
•
The meter display changes, based on the  
bandwidth you are setting up.  
Mode Bandwidth Selection (Hz)  
Default  
500 Hz  
500 Hz  
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250,  
300, 400, 500, 600, 1000,  
1500, 2000, 2500  
CW  
FSK  
250, 500, 1000, 1500  
3 As for CW, you can further adjust the shift  
frequency for the pass band. Turn the  
HI/SHIFT control clockwise to increase the  
shift frequency (high), or counterclockwise to  
decrease the shift frequency (low).  
■ SSB/ FM/ AM Mode (High cut/Low cut)  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
Shift Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
2 Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise to raise  
the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to  
lower the low cut-off frequency.  
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600,  
650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950,  
1000  
800 Hz  
Mode  
Low cut Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
300 Hz  
100 Hz  
■ SSB Data Mode (Width/Shift)  
SSB/ 0, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400,  
FM  
AM  
500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000  
0, 100, 200, 300  
1 Select Data mode (USB-DATA/LSB-DATA).  
2 Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise  
to increase the bandwidth (wide), or  
counterclockwise to decrease the bandwidth  
(narrow).  
Turn the HI/SHIFT control clockwise to raise the  
high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to  
lower the high cut-off frequency.  
Mode  
High cut Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
2600 Hz  
5000 Hz  
Bandwidth Selection (Hz)  
Default  
1000, 1200, 1400, 1600,  
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400,  
500, 600, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500  
2500 Hz  
SSB/ 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400,  
FM  
2600, 2800, 3000, 3400,  
4000, 5000  
3 Turn the HI/SHIFT control clockwise to increase  
the shift frequency (high), or counterclockwise  
to decrease the shift frequency (low).  
AM  
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000  
Low cut-off frequency  
Shift Frequency (Hz)  
Default  
High cut-off frequency  
1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, 1500,  
1600, 1700, 1750, 1800, 1900, 2000, 1500 Hz  
2100, 2210  
Desired signal  
Interfering  
signal  
Interfering  
signal  
■ IF Filter A and B  
This transceiver has 2 built-in IF filters: A and  
B. The IF Filter settings are stored with the last  
settings of the LO/WIDTH and HI/SHIFT controls.  
0 Hz 1 KHz  
5 KHz  
Press [IF FIL] to toggle between IF Filter setting A  
and B (each VFO A and VFO B).  
Note: The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted  
independently for each operating mode. When you change  
the operating mode, the previous setting is recalled for each  
operating mode.  
•
“
” appears when IF filter setting A is selected  
and “ ” appears when IF filter setting B is  
selected.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REJECTING INTERFERENCE 9  
MANUAL NOTCH FILTER (SSB/ CW/ FSK)  
Use manual notch when you want to vary the width of  
the notch while verifying the interfering signal.  
Press and hold [IF FIL] to momentarily display each  
setting value of the DSP filter band as follows:  
SSB/ SSB-DATA, AM/ FM mode:  
High cut Frequency > Low cut Frequency  
1 Press [NOTCH (WIDE)] to toggle the Manual  
CW/ SSB/ SSB-DATA mode:  
Shift Frequency > Bandwidth  
FSK mode: Bandwidth only  
Notch Filter ON and OFF.  
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
2 Turn the NOTCH control to adjust to the point  
■ Filter control in SSB/ SSB-DATA mode (High/Low  
where beat noise just disappears.  
and Width/Shift)  
■ Notch Filter Bandwidth  
In SSB and SSB-DATA modes, you can switch the  
Hi/Low cut operation and the Width/Shift operation.  
Press and hold [NOTCH (WIDE)] to toggle the  
Notch filter bandwidth between NORMAL and  
WIDE.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
28 (SSB) or 29 (SSB-DATA).  
•
“
” appears when the Notch filter  
bandwidth is set to WIDE.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the  
filter control type HI/LO (1) or WIDTH/SHIFT  
(2).  
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM)  
Two types of Beat Cancel DSP filters are available.  
Beat Cancel 1 (BC1) is effective for removing a weak  
beat or continuous beat signals. Beat Cancel 2 (BC2)  
is effective for removing intermittent beat signals, such  
as CW signals.  
AUTO NOTCH FILTER (SSB)  
The Auto Notch filter automatically locates and  
attenuates any single interfering tone within the  
receive pass band. This function operates digitally  
at the IF filter level, hence it can affect your S-meter  
reading and may also affect (slightly attenuate) your  
desired signal. However, controlling the AGC level by  
notching out the strong interfering beat signals could  
bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the  
interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak,  
you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more  
effectively.  
Filter pass band (AF)  
Interfering  
tones  
Desired  
signal  
Before  
After  
Receive pass band  
Press [BC (A.NOTCH)] to cycle through Beat Cancel  
1, Beat Cancel 2, and OFF.  
Interfering  
tones  
•
“
” or “  
” appears when the Beat Cancel  
function is ON.  
Desired  
signal  
•
The interfering beat signals are removed.  
Before  
After  
NOISE REDUCTION (ALL MODES)  
This transceiver provides 2 types of Noise Reduction  
functions (NR1 and NR2) for reducing random noise  
which interferes with the desired signal.  
Press and hold [BC (A.NOTCH)] to toggle the Auto  
Notch Filter ON and OFF.  
•
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
NR1 differs, depending on the reception mode.  
When receiving a voice call in SSB/ FM/ AM mode,  
noise reduction uses a spectrum subtraction system.  
When receiving a non-voice call in CW/ FSK mode,  
noise reduction uses a LMS adaptive filter which  
emphasizes the periodic signal.  
The interfering beat signals are notched out.  
■ Auto Notch Tracking Speed  
If the interfering beat signals change the tone  
frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch  
tracking speed.  
NR2 uses a SPAC format, which extracts a periodic  
signal from within the received signal.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 30.  
Press [NR (LEV)] to cycle between NR1, NR2, and  
OFF.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the  
level from FIX (0), and 1 to 4.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears, depending on which  
•
Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking  
speed and Level 4 is the fastest. FIX  
terminates the beat tone tracking. Adjust  
this parameter manually to remove the beat  
signal if necessary.  
noise reduction filter is selected.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE  
■ Setting the NR1 Level Adjustment  
PRE-AMPLIFIER  
NR1 uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise  
element from the received signals. When the S/N  
ratio is reasonably good in SSB, using NR1 will  
improve the S/N further.  
Switching the pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce  
interference from adjacent frequencies.  
Press [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to toggle the pre-amplifier ON  
and OFF.  
While NR1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise  
reduction level by pressing and holding [NR (LEV)],  
then turning the MULTI/CH control to select the  
level from 1 to 10. The default is 5. The level is  
saved separately for SSB/FM/AM and CW/FSK.  
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
The ON/ OFF setting will be automatically stored in  
the current band. Each time you select the same  
band, the same setting will be automatically selected  
The frequency range of each band is provided in the  
table below (under “ATTENUATOR”).  
■ Setting the NR2 Time Constant  
You can change the correlation time for NR2  
(SPAC). When in SSB mode, select the correlation  
time that allows you to hear signals with clarity.  
When receiving CW, it is best to select the longest  
correlation time that allows reliable reception. The  
longer the correlation time, the better the S/N ratio.  
ATTENUATOR  
The Attenuator reduces the level of received  
signals. This function is useful when there is strong  
interference from adjacent frequencies.  
When NR2 is ON, press and hold [NR (LEV)], then  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select the correlation  
time from 2 to 20 ms. The default is 20 ms.  
Press [ATT (RX ANT)] to toggle the attenuator ON  
and OFF.  
•
“
” appears when this function is ON.  
Note:  
The ON/ OFF setting will be automatically stored  
in the current band. Each time you select the  
same frequency band, the attenuator setting will be  
automatically recalled. The frequency range of each  
band is shown below.  
◆
When using Noise Reduction 1 in SSB, FM, or AM  
mode, the beat signal is suppressed along with the  
normal signal. This is not a malfunction.  
◆
Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the  
clarity of signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the  
conditions.  
Frequency  
Band (MHz)  
Pre-amplifier  
(Default)  
Attenuator  
(Default)  
NOISE BLANKER  
The Noise Blanker is designed to reduce pulse noise  
such as that generated by automobile ignitions. The  
Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.  
0.03 ~ 0.522  
0.522 ~ 2.5  
2.5 ~ 4.1  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
•
NB1 performs blanking through an analog circuit.  
NB2 performs blanking using DSP.  
6.9 ~ 7.5  
Press [NB (LEV)] to cycle between Noise Blanker 1,  
Noise Blanker 2, and OFF.  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
10.5 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 60.0  
ON  
•
“
” or “  
” appears, depending on which  
ON  
Noise Blanker is selected.  
ON  
You can further adjust the Noise Blanker level from  
1 to 10. The default level is 6. Press and hold [NB  
(LEV)], then turn the MULTI/CH control to adjust the  
Noise Blanker level.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
•
“NB LV.” and the current level appear on the  
sub-display.  
Note:  
CW REVERSE (RECEPTION)  
◆
◆
◆
◆
The Noise Blanker is available only for SSB, CW, FSK, and  
AM modes.  
This function pivots the BFO from the default position  
(USB) to another position (LSB) in CW mode. It is  
sometimes effective to remove the interfering signals  
from the IF passband by pivoting the BFO.  
Increasing the Noise Blanker level degrades the  
intermodulation characteristics of the transceiver.  
For effective Noise Blanker operation, experiment with both  
NB1 and NB2 on each band.  
When using Noise Blanker 2 and a CW signal is received,  
there are times when the received signal may be distorted.  
This is not a malfunction.  
1 Press [CW/FSK (REV)] until “CW” appears.  
2 Press and hold [CW/FSK (REV)].  
◆
While operating the Noise Blanker 2, if a strong signal is  
received, the Blanking effect will decrease. In theory, this is  
•
“CW” changes to “CWR”.  
how the operation should perform; it is not a malfunction.  
3 To recover the default BFO position, press and  
hold [CW/FSK (REV)] again.  
•
“CWR” changes to “CW”.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MEMORY FEATURES  
MEMORY CHANNELS  
This transceiver provides you with 120 memory  
channels, numbered 00 to 99, P0 to P9, and E0 to E9,  
for storing operating frequency data, modes, and other  
information. Memory channels 00 to 99 are called  
Conventional Memory Channels. Memory channels  
P0 to P9 are designed for programming VFO tuning  
ranges and scan ranges. Memory channels E0 to E9  
are Expansion Memory Channels. The data you can  
store is listed below.  
•
•
Simplex channels:  
RX frequency = TX frequency  
Split-frequency channels:  
RX frequency TX frequency  
Memory channels P0 to P9 can also be used as  
simplex channels.  
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the  
RIT or XIT offset will be stored.  
■ Simplex Channels  
Conventional memory channels are used for storing  
data you will often recall. For example, you may store  
the frequency where you regularly meet your club  
members.  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO is  
selected.  
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc., to be stored.  
Channel  
Channel  
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
Parameter  
RX Frequency  
00 ~ 99/  
E0 ~ E9  
P0 ~ P9  
•
“
” appears.  
Yes1  
(simplex)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
TX Frequency  
Mode for RX  
Mode for TX  
Yes1  
(simplex)  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [CLR].  
Programmable VFO  
Start/ End Frequencies  
No  
Yes  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
Tone Frequency  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
•
You can also select a channel by entering  
a 2-digit number, such as 12, using the  
numeric keys. Press [1.8 (1)], [3.5 (2)] for  
example.  
CTCSS Frequency  
Tone/ CTCSS ON/ OFF  
Status  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes1  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes1  
Yes  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel Lockout  
ON/ OFF  
5 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.  
Filter A/ B status  
1 Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites  
the contents of the channel.  
•
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
The default values for the Expansion Memory  
Channels are listed below. (All channels, Simplex,  
USB mode, and Memory Names are blank.)  
■ Split-Frequency Channels  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to show which VFO is  
No.  
E0  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
K type  
5332 kHz  
5348 kHz  
5358.5 kHz  
5373 kHz  
5405 kHz  
Blank  
E type  
5260 kHz  
5280 kHz  
5290 kHz  
5368 kHz  
5373 kHz  
5400 kHz  
5405 kHz  
Blank  
selected.  
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc., to be stored.  
•
This frequency and mode will be used for  
transmitting.  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select the other VFO.  
4 Select the reception frequency and mode.  
5 Press [SPLIT].  
•
“
” appears.  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
6 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
STORING DATA IN MEMORY  
There are 2 methods used for storing transmission/  
reception frequencies and associated data in memory  
channels 00 to 99. Use either method, depending  
on the relationship of the reception and transmission  
frequencies you store:  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [CLR].  
7 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MEMORY FEATURES  
•
You can also select a channel by entering  
•
You can also change channels by entering  
a 2-digit number. Press [24 (8)], [28 (9)] for  
example.  
a 2-digit number, such as 12, using the  
numeric keys. Press [1.8 (1)], [3.5 (2)] for  
example.  
3 To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].  
•
The transceiver re-displays the memory  
channel or VFO frequency that was selected  
before you activated Memory Scroll.  
8 Press [M.IN] to store the data.  
Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory  
Scroll mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the  
current VFO data to the memory channel you selected.  
•
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX  
while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone  
frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.  
■ Temporary Frequency Changes  
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in  
Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change  
the data without overwriting the contents of the  
memory channel.  
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL  
There are 2 modes which allow you to retrieve  
frequencies and associated data that you stored in a  
memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.  
1 Access Menu No. 22 and select “on”.  
•
Skip this step when changing only the  
associated data (not the frequency).  
2 Recall a memory channel.  
■ Memory Recall  
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.  
In this mode, the transceiver receives and  
transmits using a frequency that you retrieve.  
You can temporarily change the frequency and  
associated data without overwriting the contents  
of the memory channel when Menu No. 22 is ON  
(default is OFF).  
•
Use only the Tuning control to select a  
frequency.  
4 If necessary, for future use, store the changed  
data in another memory channel. Refer to  
“Channel ➡ Channel Transfer” {below}.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
Note:  
•
The memory channel that was last selected  
appears.  
◆
◆
If Menu No. 22 is set to “on”, the frequency of the  
memory channel can be change  
When turning this function ON, you can use the following  
functions in Memory Channel mode.  
• Auto Zero-Beat  
• Shiftable RX Frequency during Split Transmission  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
MEMORY TRANSFER  
•
Continuously holding down Mic [UP]/ [DWN]  
steps the transceiver through the memory  
channels until the key is released.  
■ Memory ➡ VFO Transfer  
After retrieving frequencies and associated data  
from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data  
to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,  
when the frequency you want to monitor is near the  
frequency stored in a memory channel.  
•
•
Memory channels which contain no data are  
skipped.  
You cannot change memory channels while  
transmitting.  
1 Recall the desired memory channel.  
3 To exit Memory Recall mode, press [M/V].  
Note: If Menu No. 22 is set to “on”, the frequency of the  
2 Press [M>V].  
memory channel can be changed.  
•
When a simplex channel is recalled, the data  
is copied to VFO A or VFO B, depending on  
which VFO was used to recall the channel.  
■ Memory Scroll  
Use this mode to check the contents of the  
•
When a split channel is recalled, the RX  
data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is  
copied to VFO B.  
memory channels without changing the current  
reception frequency. In this mode, frequencies you  
retrieve are not used for receiving and transmitting.  
Note: Pressing [M>V] after temporarily changing the  
retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.  
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
•
The memory channel that was last selected  
appears.  
■ Channel ➡ Channel Transfer  
You can also copy channel information from one  
memory channel to another. This function is useful  
when storing frequencies and associated data that  
you temporarily change in Memory Recall mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to step through the memory channels.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMORY FEATURES 10  
1 Recall the desired memory channel.  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
Memory Name  
Channel 00 ~ 99  
Memory Name  
➡
➡
2 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
➡
➡
3 Select the memory channel where you would  
like the data copied, using the MULTI/CH  
control.  
Filter A/ B status  
Filter A/ B status  
4 Press [M.IN].  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
TX/RX frequency  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
TX/RX frequency  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
Channel 00 ~ 99  
Channel E0 ~ E9  
Channel 00 ~ 99  
Channel E0 ~ E9  
➡
RX frequency  
TX frequency  
Mode for RX  
RX frequency  
TX frequency  
Mode for RX  
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
Mode for TX/RX  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Mode for TX/RX  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Mode for TX  
Mode for TX  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone/ CTCSS/ Cross  
tone ON/ OFF status  
Tone/ CTCSS/ Cross  
tone ON/ OFF status  
➡
➡
➡
➡
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Tone/ CTCSS  
ON/ OFF status  
Tone/ CTCSS  
ON/ OFF status  
➡
➡
➡
➡
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Filter A/ B status  
Filter A/ B status  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
Note: After copying, the Memory Channel Lockout turns OFF.  
Filter A/ B status  
Filter A/ B status  
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES  
Channel 00 ~ 99  
Channel E0 ~ E9  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
➡
Memory channels P0 to P9 allow you to store  
frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.  
Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To  
tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,  
store the start and end frequencies for that range in  
advance.  
TX/RX frequency  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
Mode for TX/RX  
––  
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
RX frequency  
Mode for RX  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
2 Select the desired start frequency.  
TX frequency  
Mode for TX  
––  
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
•
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the  
storage process, press [CLR].  
Tone/ CTCSS/ Cross  
tone ON/ OFF status  
Tone/ CTCSS/ Cross  
tone ON/ OFF status  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of  
P0 to P9.  
➡
➡
➡
➡
Memory Name  
Memory Name  
Memory Channel  
Lockout ON/ OFF  
Memory Channel  
Lockout OFF  
Filter A/ B status  
Filter A/ B status  
5 Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the  
memory channel.  
Channel P0 ~ P9  
TX/RX frequency  
Channel 00 ~ 99  
RX frequency  
TX frequency  
Mode for RX  
Mode for TX  
––  
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
➡
•
“ENDINPUT” appears on the sub-display.  
Mode for TX/RX  
6 Turn the Tuning control or MULTI/CH control to  
select the end frequency.  
Start frequency  
End frequency  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
7 Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the  
––  
memory channel.  
Tone frequency  
CTCSS frequency  
•
The previous data stored in the channel is  
overwritten.  
Tone/ CTCSS/ Cross  
tone ON/ OFF status  
Tone/ CTCSS/ Cross  
tone ON/ OFF status  
➡
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 MEMORY FEATURES  
■ Confirming Start/ End Frequencies  
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS  
Use this procedure to check the start and end  
frequencies that you stored in channels P0 to P9.  
If there are memory channels that you will not recall  
in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of  
those channels.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel from P0 to  
P9.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select the desired memory channel.  
•
You can also select a channel by entering a  
2-digit number. Press [ENT], [7 (3)], [10 (4)] for  
example.  
3 Press [A/B (A=B)] to check the start frequency,  
then press [A/B (A=B)] again to check the end  
frequency.  
3 Press and hold [CLR].  
■ Programmable VFO  
•
A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel  
data has been erased.  
Using the start and end frequencies that you stored  
in channels P0 to P9, Programmable VFO restricts  
the frequency range that you can tune with the  
Tuning control. One application of this function is  
to help you operate within the authorized frequency  
limits of your license.  
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME  
You can assign a name to each memory channel, with  
a maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters.  
Note: You cannot name the Quick Memory channels.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel from P0 to  
P9.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select a memory channel.  
You can now only tune from the start frequency to  
the end frequency, using the Tuning control.  
3 Press [Q-MR].  
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press [M.IN]/ [SCAN  
(SG.SEL)] to select the desired alpha-numeric  
character. You can move the cursor to the left  
by pressing [Q-M.IN], or to the right by pressing  
[Q-MR]. Press [CL] to erase the character at the  
cursor.  
Note: Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI/  
CH control changes the memory channel number while in  
Programmable VFO mode.  
MEMORY CHANNEL LOCKOUT  
You can lock out memory channels that you prefer  
not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is  
described in the next chapter {page 48}.  
5 After selecting all the necessary characters for the  
memory channel name, press [MENU] to store the  
name.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
6 When you recall a memory channel with a name,  
the name is displayed on the sub-display along  
with the memory channel number.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select the desired memory channel.  
3 Press [CLR].  
Available alphanumeric characters:  
•
Do not hold down the [CLR] key. Holding  
[CLR] for more than approximately 2 seconds  
will erase the contents of the memory channel.  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q(q) R S T U V W X  
Y Z (space) + – / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
•
A dot appears beside the right-most digit of  
the memory channel number to indicate the  
channel has been locked out.  
QUICK MEMORY  
Quick Memory is designed to quickly and temporarily  
save data without specifying a particular memory  
channel. Use Quick Memory to store data you will not  
use in future operating sessions. For example, as you  
tune across the band looking for DX, it is convenient  
to store stations that you want to contact. You can  
quickly jump between several different memory  
channels as you monitor them.  
•
Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles between  
adding and removing the channel from the scan  
list.  
Quick Memory channels can store the following data:  
VFO A frequency and  
operating mode  
VFO B frequency and  
operating mode  
RIT ON/ OFF  
XIT ON/ OFF  
RIT/ XIT offset frequency FINE ON/ OFF  
Noise Blanker ON/ OFF DSP Beat Cancel  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMORY FEATURES 10  
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS  
You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when  
you operate the transceiver in VFO mode.  
DSP Noise Reduction  
OFF/ 1/ 2  
IF Notch  
DSP filter bandwidth  
Simplex/ Split  
1 Press [Q-MR].  
NUMBER OF QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS  
•
•
The current memory channel number appears.  
This transceiver provides up to 10 Quick Memory  
channels. You can adjust the number of available  
channels by accessing Menu No. 21 and selecting “3”,  
“5” (default), or “10”.  
If there is no data stored in any Quick Memory  
channel, the data cannot be recalled to the  
current VFO; an error beep sounds.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick  
Memory channel.  
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY  
•
You cannot change memory channels while  
transmitting.  
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously  
stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective  
Quick Memory channel. When all 10 memory  
channels contain frequencies, storing one more  
frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9  
off the stack (the data is lost).  
3 To exit, press [Q-MR] again.  
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the  
TF-SET function.  
The following diagram illustrates how the Quick  
Memory stacks the data in memory each time you  
press [Q-M.IN].  
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES  
After recalling a Quick Memory channel, you can  
temporarily change the data without overwriting  
the contents of the channel. You can change the  
frequency even when you select “oFF” in Menu  
No. 22.  
New data  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
14.250  
18.111  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
3.545  
14.195  
1 Press [Q-MR].  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick  
New data  
Memory channel.  
21.005  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
14.250  
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
4 To store the changed data in the Quick Memory,  
18.111  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
3.545  
press [Q-M.IN].  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
•
This action stores the new data in the current  
channel and bumps the old frequency to the  
next higher Quick Memory channel.  
New data  
14.085  
21.005  
24.911  
14.005  
14.235  
Memory 0 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4  
5 To exit, press [Q-MR] again.  
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using  
the TF-SET function.  
14.250  
18.111  
50.015  
7.082  
29.610  
Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Memory 9  
You can store data in the Quick Memory only when  
you operate the transceiver in VFO mode.  
QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER  
This function copies the contents of the recalled  
memory channel to the VFO.  
1 Select the frequency, mode, etc., on the transceiver  
VFO.  
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel.  
2 Press [Q-M.IN].  
2 Press [M>V].  
•
Each time you press [Q-M.IN], the current VFO  
data is written to the Quick Memory.  
Note: Pressing [M>V] after temporarily changing the recalled  
data copies the new data to the VFO.  
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the ON status and the offset will  
also be stored.  
ERASING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS  
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel.  
2 Press and hold [CLR].  
•
A confirmation message appears on the display.  
3 Press [CLR].  
The channel data has been erased.  
•
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 SCAN  
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of  
your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable  
with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating  
efficiency.  
“VGROUP–9” which represents channel P9.  
If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are  
programmed in VGROUP–0 to 9 (Memory channel  
numbers P0 ~ P9 in other words):  
This transceiver provides the following types of scans:  
1 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] in VFO mode.  
•
“VGROUP–n” appears on the sub-display  
(where n represents a number from 0 to 9).  
Scan Type  
Purpose  
Scans the entire frequency  
range of the transceiver.  
VFO Scan  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the Program  
Scan memory (VGROUP–0 to VGROUP–9). As  
you select the channel, “on” or “oFF” appears  
on the frequency display. “on” signifies that the  
selected VGROUP is active for the Program Scan  
and “oFF” signifies that the selected VGROUP is  
inactive for the Program Scan.  
Normal  
Scans the specific frequency  
ranges stored in Memory  
channels P0 ~ P9.  
Scan  
Program  
Scan  
Scans all Memory channels,  
from 00 ~ 99, P0 ~ P9, and  
E0 ~ E9.  
All-Channel  
Scan  
Memory  
Scan  
Scans the specific Memory  
channel groups.  
Group Scan  
Scans the Quick Memory  
channels.  
Configure all P.SCAN channels (VGROUP–0 ~  
VGROUP–9) as “oFF” by pressing [SCAN (SG.  
SEL)].  
Quick Memory Scan  
Note:  
◆
While using CTCSS in FM mode, Scan stops only for the  
signals that contain the same CTCSS tone that you selected.  
◆
Pressing Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop.  
3 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or press [CLR]  
to return to the current VFO mode.  
NORMAL SCAN  
While operating the transceiver in VFO mode, 2 types  
of scanning are available.  
4 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start the VFO Scan.  
5 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR] to stop the VFO  
Scan.  
•
VFO Scan  
Note:  
◆
While scanning, you can change the scan speed by  
turning the RIT/ XIT control. Turn the control clockwise/  
counterclockwise to decrease/ increase the scan speed. The  
speed indicator appears on the sub-display, where P1 is the  
fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.  
The transceiver scans the entire frequency  
range of the transceiver. For example, if you are  
operating and receiving on the transceiver’s  
VFO A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the  
frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to  
59.999.99 MHz. (Refer to the available VFO  
frequency range in the specifications.)  
◆
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.  
PROGRAM SCAN  
•
Program Scan  
Program Scan monitors the range between the  
start and end frequencies that you have stored in  
Memory channels P0 ~ P9 (VGROUP–0 ~ 9). Refer  
to “STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 43} for  
details on how to store the start and end frequencies  
to these Memory channels.  
By programming the start and end frequency  
in Memory channels P0 ~ P9, you can limit the  
scanning frequency range. Since there are  
10 memory channels (P0 ~ P9) available for  
specifying the start and end frequencies, you can  
select 1 or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to  
scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX  
station on a certain frequency but the station may  
appear on a slightly higher or lower frequency.  
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels  
(VGROUP–0 to 9) and sequentially scan the  
frequency ranges that you stored in these channels.  
If the current VFO frequency falls within the selected  
VGROUP frequency range, Program Scan starts from  
the VGROUP number and then continues to scan  
the next larger VGROUP number. If the current VFO  
frequency is outside all of the VGROUP frequency  
ranges, Program Scan starts from the smallest  
VGROUP number that is selected as “on” (each  
VGROUP can be set to either “on” or “oFF”).  
VFO SCAN  
VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is  
available for the current VFO. When the Program  
Scan frequency range is not programmed or no  
Scan Group is selected for the Program Scan, the  
transceiver also scans the entire frequency range  
available for the current VFO.  
Note: At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from P0  
to P9) must be programmed and selected to perform Program  
Scan. If no P.SCAN (memory channel P0 ~ P9) is selected for  
Program Scan, the transceiver performs VFO Scan {above}.  
The memory channel numbers P0 ~ P9 have alias  
names, “VGROUP”. “VGROUP–0” represents channel  
P0, “VGROUP–1” represents channel P1,  
1 Press [A/B (A=B)] to select VFO A or VFO B.  
“VGROUP–2” represents channel P2, and so on up to  
2 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)].  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCAN 11  
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED  
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for  
each memory channel from P0 to P9 so that Program  
Scan slows down the scanning speed. To specify the  
slow down frequency points, first program the start  
and end frequencies into a memory channel (P0 ~ P9).  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN] to select the memory channel (VGROUP–0  
to VGROUP–9). As you select the Memory  
Channel, “on” or “oFF” appears on the main  
frequency display. “on” signifies that the memory  
channel is active for the Program Scan and “oFF”  
signifies that the memory channel group is inactive  
for the Program Scan.  
1 Access Menu No. 23 to confirm that the function is  
ON (default is ON).  
2 You can further configure the slow down frequency  
width. Access Menu No. 24 to select the range  
from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).  
4 To activate the Program Scan frequency range,  
select the desired VGROUP number by turning the  
MULTI/CH control. Then, press [M.IN] to select  
“on” for the VGROUP (channel). When a channel  
is activated for Program Scan, “on” appears on the  
display.  
Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 20,  
the Program Scan slows down to a 500 Hz width, centering  
the frequency you marked below.  
3 Press [M/V], then turn the MULTI/CH control to  
recall the memory channel (P0 ~ P9) for which you  
want to specify the scan slow down frequencies.  
4 Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency  
point that you want the Program Scan to slow  
down. Then, press [Q-M.IN] to mark the slow  
down frequency point.  
5 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or press [CLR]  
to return to the current VFO mode.  
•
“ ” appears.  
6 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start the Program  
5 Repeat step 4 to specify the center slow down  
Scan.  
frequency points.  
•
To quickly move toward a desired frequency  
while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the  
MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
•
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency  
points for each channel.  
6 If you want to clear a slow down frequency point  
that you previously stored, select the frequency  
that you stored, then press [Q-M.IN] at this  
frequency spot where “ ” appears.  
•
Turning the RIT/ XIT control clockwise  
decreases the scan speed and  
counterclockwise increases the speed, except  
while in FM mode. The current scan speed is  
shown on the display; P1 is the fastest speed  
and P9 is the slowest.  
•
A confirmation beep sounds and “ ”  
disappears.  
•
To clear all slow down frequency points, press  
and hold [Q-M.IN].  
•
While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops  
on a frequency where a signal is present. The  
transceiver will either remain on that channel  
for a short time (Time-Operated mode) or until  
the signal drops out (Carrier-Operated mode),  
depending on which mode you select via Menu  
No. 26 {page 50}.  
7 Press [M/V] to return to VFO mode.  
8 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start the Program Scan  
with the slow down frequency point(s).  
Note:  
◆
During Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ XIT control  
to adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/  
counterclockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The  
Program Scan speed indicator appears on the main display  
during Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the  
slowest.  
7 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR].  
Note:  
◆
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold while in FM mode, Scan may fail to stop at  
a channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn the  
SQL control slightly counterclockwise.  
◆
◆
You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.  
Although you can specify the Program Scan slow down  
frequency point in FM mode, it does not function.  
◆
◆
If you press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] before storing any frequency  
range for memory channels P0 to P9, the transceiver starts  
VFO scan.  
◆
When copying a Program Memory Channel, all frequency  
points are cleared.  
When the current receive frequency is within one of the  
ranges that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts  
with the current frequency. The operating mode stored in the  
memory channel is used.  
◆
◆
The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the  
memory channel will be overwritten with the changed mode.  
When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of  
the MULTI/CH control, turning the control clockwise causes  
Scan to jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to  
the end frequency.  
◆
◆
Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT  
functions.  
While in FM mode, Program Scan monitors rounded off  
frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 14 setting.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 SCAN  
SCAN HOLD  
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN  
This function stops Program Scan for approximately  
5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the  
desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the  
MULTI/CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
Use the following procedure to scan all the memory  
channels that contain frequency data in sequence,  
ignoring the Memory Group number.  
1 Select Time-Operated or Carrier-Operated mode  
To use this function, access Menu No. 25, and select  
“on”. The default is OFF.  
via Menu No. 26.  
2 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch  
threshold to mute the speaker.  
MEMORY SCAN  
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which  
you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only  
a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).  
4 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to enter Scan  
Group Select mode.  
•
•
Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the  
Memory channel group.  
Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal  
is present, regardless of the operating mode. The  
transceiver will either remain on that channel for a  
short time (Time-Operated mode) or until the signal  
drops out (Carrier-Operated mode). Use Menu No.  
26 to select the mode. The default is “to” (Time-  
Operated).  
MGROUP–0 represents Memory channels  
0 ~ 9, MGROUP–1 represents Memory  
channels 10 ~ 19 and so on up to MGROUP–9  
which represents Memory channels 90 ~  
99, MGROUP–P which represents Memory  
channels P0 ~ P9 and MGROUP–E which  
represents Memory channels E0 ~ E9.  
SCAN RESUME  
5 As you select the Memory Groups using the  
MULTI/CH control, press [M.IN] to select “on” for  
all Memory Groups.  
The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency  
(or memory channel) where a signal is detected. It  
then continues scanning according to which resume  
mode you have selected. You can choose one of the  
following modes. The default is Time-Operated mode.  
6 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to return to  
Memory Recall mode.  
7 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to start All-channel Scan.  
•
Time-Operated mode (“to”)  
•
Scan starts from the current memory channel  
and ascends up through the channel numbers.  
(The scan direction cannot be changed.)  
The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or  
memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,  
then continues to scan, even if the signal is still  
present.  
•
To jump to a desired channel while scanning,  
turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/  
[DWN].  
•
Carrier-Operated mode (“co”)  
The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or  
memory channel) until the signal drops out. There  
is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and  
scan resumption.  
8 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR].  
Note:  
◆
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond the  
squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel where  
a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control  
slightly counterclockwise.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
◆
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT  
functions.  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 26.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “to”  
(Time-Operated) or “co” (Carrier-Operated).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
You can lock out the memory channels that you prefer  
not to monitor while scanning (refer to “Memory  
Channel Lockout”).  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCAN 11  
■ Performing Group Scan  
GROUP SCAN  
Group Scan starts with the smallest group number  
and repeats the sequence. For example, if you  
selected “on” for MGROUP–3, MGROUP–5, and  
MGROUP–7, the transceiver scans the channels  
in MGROUP–3 > MGROUP–5 > MGROUP–7 >  
MGROUP–3 and so on.  
110 memory channels are divided into 11 groups  
so that you can select one or more groups to be  
scanned, depending on the situation.  
■ Memory Group  
When you store frequency data in a memory  
channel, the memory channel belongs to one of 11  
groups as shown below.  
1 Select Time-Operated or Carrier-Operated  
mode via Menu No. 26.  
2 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
MGROUP-0 Memory Channel Nos. 00 ~ 09  
MGROUP-1 Memory Channel Nos. 10 ~ 19  
MGROUP-2 Memory Channel Nos. 20 ~ 29  
MGROUP-3 Memory Channel Nos. 30 ~ 39  
MGROUP-4 Memory Channel Nos. 40 ~ 49  
MGROUP-5 Memory Channel Nos. 50 ~ 59  
MGROUP-6 Memory Channel Nos. 60 ~ 69  
MGROUP-7 Memory Channel Nos. 70 ~ 79  
MGROUP-8 Memory Channel Nos. 80 ~ 89  
MGROUP-9 Memory Channel Nos. 90 ~ 99  
MGROUP-P Memory Channel Nos. P0 ~ P9  
MGROUP-E Memory Channel Nos. E0 ~ E9  
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch  
threshold.  
4 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL] to start Memory Group  
Scan.  
•
Scan ascends up through the channel  
numbers. (The scan direction cannot be  
changed.)  
•
To jump to a desired channel while  
scanning, turn the MULTI/CH control or  
press and hold Mic [UP]/ [DWN].  
5 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or  
[CLR].  
Note:  
◆
If you have turned the SQL control clockwise, far beyond  
the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel  
in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn the  
SQL control slightly counterclockwise.  
■ Scan Group Select  
◆
◆
When the current channel is within one of the groups  
that you selected, Scan starts with the current channel.  
You can select one or more groups to be scanned.  
First, select the groups to be scanned.  
When the current channel is outside all the groups that  
you selected, Scan starts with the group number that  
is larger than and closest to the group number of the  
current channel.  
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.  
•
“
” appears.  
◆
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT  
functions.  
2 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to enter Scan  
Group Select mode.  
3 As you turn the MULTI/CH control, the  
MGROUP number on the sub-display changes.  
QUICK MEMORY SCAN  
•
MGROUP–0 represents Memory channels  
0 ~ 9, MGROUP–1 represents Memory  
channels 10 ~ 19 and so on up to  
1 Press [Q-MR] to enter Quick Memory mode.  
2 Press [SCAN (SG.SEL] to start Quick Memory  
Scan.  
MGROUP–9 which represents Memory  
channels 90 ~ 99 and MGROUP-P which  
represents Memory channels P0 ~ P9.  
•
Scan starts from the current quick memory  
channel and ascends up through the channel  
numbers. (The scan direction cannot be  
changed.)  
4 Press [M.IN] to select “on” to add the group to  
the Group Scan list.  
3 To stop Scan, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR].  
•
If you do not want to scan the selected  
Group, press [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select  
“oFF”.  
5 Press and hold [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or [CLR]. to  
exit the Scan Group Select mode.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
ANTENNAS  
Antenna Selection Frequency Range (MHz)  
0.03 ~ 0.522  
0.522 ~ 2.5  
2.5 ~ 4.1  
10.5 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 60.0  
ANT 1/ ANT 2  
Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/  
50 MHz band on the TX/ RX unit rear panel.  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select ANT 1 or  
ANT 2.  
6.9 ~ 7.5  
•
“
” or “  
” appears to indicate which  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
antenna is selected.  
Note: Connect an external tuner to the ANT 1 connector  
only, then select ANT 1. The internal antenna tuner will be  
automatically bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.  
RX ANT  
APO (Auto Power OFF)  
Press and hold [ATT (RX ANT)] to toggle the RX ANT  
between enabled and disabled.  
You can set the transceiver to switch OFF  
automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or  
adjusted for a certain period of time. One minute  
before the transceiver switches OFF, “CHECK” is  
output in Morse code.  
•
“
” appears when the RX ANT is enabled.  
DRV  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
Press and hold [METER (DRV)] to switch the Drive  
output (DRO) or Antenna output (ANT) between  
enabled and disabled.  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 86.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the APO  
time from “oFF”, “60”, “120”, or “180” minutes.  
Drive output : Use the standard input of 1 mW for the  
linear amplifier and other connections.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
•
“
” appears when the Drive output is enabled.  
Note:  
◆
The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.  
Antenna output: The DRV terminal functions as an  
antenna output terminal for an external receiver. With  
this function, the RX signal that is input from the  
currently selected antenna (ANT1, ANT2, or RX ANT)  
is split in the middle, with one input to the RX circuit  
and the other output to the DRV terminal.  
◆
The APO timer starts counting down when no key presses,  
no control adjustments, and no command (COM connector)  
sequences are detected.  
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER  
•
“ ” appears when the DRV (Antenna output) is  
enabled.  
As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION”  
{page 1}, matching the impedance of the coaxial cable  
and antenna is important. To adjust the impedance  
between the antenna and the transceiver, you have  
the choice of using the internal antenna tuner or an  
external antenna tuner. This section describes how  
to use the internal antenna tuner. For the external  
antenna tuner, consult the instruction manual that  
comes with the tuner.  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
When you use the Antenna output function, due to the loss  
of the splitter, the receive sensitivity and gain decreases by  
approximately 3 dB.  
During transmission, the transmission output will leak a  
little through internal isolation (approximately -20 dBm at 50  
MHz).  
The ON/OFF status of the Antenna output function is stored  
separately in the 50 MHz band and HF band.  
1 Select the transmit frequency.  
■ Selecting the DRV Connector Function  
2 Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select “  
”
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No.  
85.  
or “  
”.  
•
If the external antenna tuner (AT-300) is  
connected to the ANT 1 connector, select  
ANT 2 to use the internal antenna tuner.  
The internal antenna tuner is automatically  
bypassed if the external antenna tuner is  
connected to ANT 1.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select  
“DRO” or “ANT”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
3 Press and hold [AT (TUNE)].  
The ANT 1, ANT 2, RX ANT, and DRV settings will  
automatically be stored in the antenna band memory.  
The next time you select the same band, the same  
antenna will be automatically selected.  
•
CW mode is automatically selected and tuning  
begins.  
•
•
“
” blinks and the TX-RX LED lights red.  
To cancel tuning, press [AT (TUNE)] again.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
•
If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely  
high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in  
Morse code) sounds and the internal antenna  
tuner is bypassed. Before attempting to tune  
again, adjust the antenna system to lower the  
SWR.  
Internal Antenna Tuner Preset Frequency Range  
(MHz)  
0.03 ~ 1.85  
1.85 ~ 2.50  
2.50 ~ 3.525  
3.525 ~ 3.575  
3.575 ~ 3.725  
3.725 ~ 4.1  
4.1 ~ 6.9  
14.1 ~ 14.5  
14.5 ~ 18.5  
18.5 ~ 21.15  
21.15 ~ 21.5  
21.5 ~ 25.5  
25.5 ~ 29.0  
29.0 ~ 30.0  
30.0 ~ 51.0  
51.0 ~ 52.0  
52.0 ~ 53.0  
53.0 ~ 60.0  
4 Monitor the display and check that tuning has  
successfully finished.  
•
•
If the tuning was successful, “  
” stops  
blinking and the red TX-RX LED turns OFF.  
If tuning does not finish within approximately  
20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in Morse code)  
sounds. Press [AT (TUNE)] to stop the alarm  
and tuning.  
6.9 ~ 7.05  
7.05 ~ 7.1  
•
•
If you want the transceiver to stay in  
transmission mode after the tuning completes,  
access Menu No. 57 and select “on”.  
7.1 ~ 7.5  
7.5 ~ 10.5  
10.5 ~ 14.1  
To pass received signals through the internal  
antenna tuner, access Menu No. 58 and select  
“on”. When this function is ON, “  
This may reduce interference on the receive  
frequency.  
” appears.  
AUTO MODE  
You can configure a maximum of 32 frequency  
borders (VFO A and B) to change the operating mode  
automatically as you change the VFO frequency.  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
The internal antenna tuner will not tune outside the available  
transmission frequency limits.  
As a default, the following modes are programmed on  
each operating band.  
Pressing [AT (TUNE)] for more than 1 second while  
transmitting interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.  
While using CW Full Break-in, the internal antenna tuner will  
be in-line for both transmission and reception.  
0.03 MHz ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB  
9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB  
Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60  
seconds. “AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.  
To add the frequency borders to the Auto Mode  
selection:  
Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates  
1:1. This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a  
malfunction.  
1 With the transceiver power OFF, press and hold  
◆
◆
Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment,  
the internal antenna tuner may not re-tune. This happens  
because of an SWR calculation algorithm tolerance.  
[LSB/USB] + [ ] to turn the transceiver ON.  
•
“AUTOMODE” appears on the sub-display.  
If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter  
indicates smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to  
lower the SWR, then attempt to tune again.  
2 Select an Auto Mode frequency memory channel  
number by turning the MULTI/CH control.  
◆
◆
Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the  
transceiver conditions.  
•
Auto Memory channels 00 to 31 are available.  
The AT-300 cannot perform tuning on the 50 MHz band.  
3 Turn the Tuning control to select a desired  
frequency border (or enter the frequency with the  
keypad {page 29}) to change the operating mode.  
PRESETTING  
4 Press [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK (REV)], [FM/AM (FM-  
N)], or [DATA] until the desired communication  
mode appears.  
After each successful tuning session, the internal  
antenna tuner Preset memory function stores the  
position of the tuning capacitor in memory. The  
position of the capacitor is stored for each of the  
antenna tuner bands (see the following table) and for  
each antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).  
5 Repeat steps 2 ~ 4 until you have added all the  
data.  
6 Press [CLR] to exit the Auto Mode frequency  
configuration.  
Press [AT (TUNE)].  
•
“
” or “  
”appears, showing that the antenna  
To activate the Auto Mode function:  
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
•
Each time you go across the antenna tuner  
band, the internal antenna tuner Preset memory  
is automatically recalled to position the tuning  
capacitor without the need for retuning. If no  
preset data exists for a particular band/ antenna  
combination, then the default data of 50 is used.  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 27.  
2 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
Note: When using Auto Mode Frequency configuration, you  
cannot use the Frequency Entry History function.  
Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum  
matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band  
has the preset data.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
The table below is an example of setting the Auto  
Mode frequency.  
BEEP FUNCTION  
The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,  
error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.  
Channel Frequency  
Operation Range  
(MHz)  
Mode  
1.620 AM  
No.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
(MHz)  
Although you can turn the beep function OFF by  
accessing Menu No. 05, we recommend you leave  
it ON in order to detect unexpected errors and  
malfunctions. You can also change the output level of  
the beeps by accessing Menu No. 05 and selecting “1”  
to “20”.  
0.030 f < 1.620  
1.620 f < 2.000  
2.000 f < 3.500  
3.500 f < 3.525  
3.525 f < 10.100  
10.100 f < 10.150  
2.000 CW  
3.500 LSB  
3.525 CW  
10.100 LSB  
10.150 CW  
The transceiver generates the following Morse code  
to tell you which mode is selected when you change  
operating modes:  
14.000 USB 10.150 f < 14.000  
Mode  
Morse Code Output  
14.070 CW-R 14.000 f < 14.070  
–
USB  
LSB  
CW  
FSK  
AM  
• •  
(U)  
(L)  
14.112 FSK  
18.068 USB 14.112 f < 18.068  
18.110 CW 18.068 f < 18.110  
21.000 USB 18.110 f < 21.000  
21.070 CW 21.000 f < 21.070  
21.125 FSK-R 21.070 f < 21.125  
21.150 CW 21.125 f < 21.150  
24.890 USB 21.150 f < 24.890  
24.930 CW 24.890 f < 24.930  
28.000 USB 24.930 f < 28.000  
14.070 f < 14.112  
–
•
• •  
– –  
•
•
(C)  
–
–
•
•
•
(R)  
(A)  
–
FM  
• •  
• •  
•
(F)  
– –  
• •  
USB-DATA  
LSB-DATA  
CW-R  
• •  
(UD)  
(LD)  
(CR)  
(RR)  
(AD)  
(FN)  
(FD)  
• • (FND)  
–
–
•
• •  
– –  
–
•
•
• •  
•
–
–
FSK-R  
•
• •  
– –  
AM-DATA  
FM-NAR  
FM-DATA  
FM-NAR-DATA  
•
• •  
–
28.070 CW  
28.150 FSK  
28.200 CW  
28.000 f < 28.070  
28.070 f < 28.150  
28.150 f < 28.200  
–
–
–
• •  
• •  
• •  
•
•
•
•
–
• •  
•
–
–
29.000 USB 28.200 f < 29.000  
30.000 FM-DATA 29.000 f < 30.000  
50.000 USB 30.000 f < 50.000  
The transceiver also generates the following warning,  
confirmation, and malfunction beeps.  
Beep Type  
Meaning  
50.100 CW  
50.000 f < 50.100  
Short, high pitch  
A valid key is pressed.  
51.000 USB 50.100 f < 51.000  
Double, high pitch A secondary function is selected.  
3 times, high pitch The third function is accepted.  
52.000 FM  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
52.000 LSB  
51.000 f < 52.000  
A key entry is accepted, Scan  
Long, high pitch  
starts, or AT tune has completed.  
Short, regular  
A function is turned OFF.  
An invalid key is pressed.  
Short, low pitch  
The internal PLL circuit unlock  
status is detected.  
Morse “UL”  
Morse “S”  
•
•
The frequencies for channels 27 ~ 31 have not  
been configured, but because they are the same  
frequency as channel 26, they will be FM mode  
51.0 MHz f < 52.0 MHz.  
CW Auto Tune cannot complete,  
or an invalid frequency is entered.  
AT Tune cannot be completed  
within the specified time.  
Morse “5”  
Since the frequencies above 52.0 MHz have not  
been configured, they will be USB mode  
52.0 MHz f < 60.0 MHz  
The antenna’s SWR is too high  
(over 10:1) to perform AT tune.  
Morse “SWR”  
1 minute before the APO (Auto  
Power Off) function switches the  
transceiver OFF, a protection  
circuit is ON. or an invalid  
voltage is detected.  
Morse “CHECK”  
Morse “BT”  
Waiting for a CW message to be  
recorded.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL  
Beep Type  
Morse “AR”  
Meaning  
To connect the linear amplifier to the REMOTE  
connector on the rear panel and to operate in the  
HF or 50 MHz band, you can configure to enable or  
disable the control signal state and the transmission  
delay time.  
The current message memory  
is full.  
DISPLAY  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 59  
(HF) or 60 (50 MHz).  
BRIGHTNESS  
The brightness of the LCD display can be selected  
from OFF, and 1 to 6 .  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “oFF”,  
“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, or “5.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 02.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “oFF”,  
RL Terminal Relay  
Setting  
Delay *3  
Operation *1 Operation *2  
“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, or “6”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
oFF  
1
–
–
–
While TX: 12 V  
While TX: 12 V  
While TX: 12 V  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
BACKLIGHT COLOR  
You can manually change the display illumination to  
suit the lighting conditions where you are operating.  
2
3
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
While TX:  
Short to GND  
4
5
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 03.  
While TX:  
Short to GND  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1”  
(amber), “2” to “9” (mixed colors), or “10” (green).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
1:  
*
Semiconductor Switch output. When transmitting,  
set it to either perform a voltage output or a  
short circuit to GND. It is possible to perform  
the operation quietly, without activating the relay.  
As a guide, a current of 10 mA or lower can be  
controlled. In order to protect the internal circuit,  
a resistance of 100 is inserted in series and  
the voltage is shifted according to the flow of the  
electric current. For example, when an electric  
current of 10 mA flows, the voltage decreases  
(when set as 1/2/3) or increases (when set as  
4/5) by 1 V. Use a range that does not cause any  
problems with your equipment.  
PANEL KEY DOUBLE FUNCTION  
RESPONSE TIME  
You can set the response time of double function  
panel keys to normal or fast. The default setting is  
normal.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 04.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1” (0.2  
second), “2” (0.5 second) or “3” (1 second)  
2:  
3:  
*
*
Mechanical Relay Operation. You can switch the  
signal of the high voltage like a vacuum tube linear  
amplifier. It is possible to control the terminal  
voltage of TL-922 (approximately -140 V).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
This function extends the time from when the  
transmission starts to when the signal is sent  
(normally approximately 10 ms), and from when  
the transmission ends to when audio output starts  
to be received (normally approximately 25 ms).  
When using a linear amplifier or other device that  
takes a relatively long time to switch between  
receiving and transmitting, or transmitting and  
receiving, such as the TL-922, you can prevent  
problems such as noise or malfunctions.  
Delay Time:  
CW/FSK: approx. 25 ms  
SSB/AM/FM: approx. 45 ms  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
LOCK FUNCTIONS  
Key  
Comments  
Still operates to turn Memory  
Channel Lockout ON/OFF. Also  
still operates to end a setting  
mode.  
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION  
Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to  
prevent you from accidentally activating a function or  
changing the current settings.  
[CLR]  
Still operates to edit a Memory  
name.  
[Q-MR]  
Press and hold [FINE (F.LOCK)] to turn the  
Frequency Lock function ON or OFF.  
Still operates to set or remove  
a Slow Scan Frequency point  
(press) or to remove all frequency  
points (press and hold).  
•
“
” appears while this function is ON.  
[Q-M.IN]  
The following keys and controls are disabled by  
Frequency Lock:  
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS  
TRANSCEIVER FRONT PANEL  
Key  
Comments  
There are 6 PF (Programmable Function) keys on the  
transceiver front panel: [PF A], [PF B], [RIT], [XIT],  
[CL], and [MULTI/CH]. You can assign your own  
desired functions to these 6 keys by accessing Menu  
Nos. 87 (PF A), 88 (PF B), 89 (RIT), 90 (XIT), 91 (CL),  
92 (MULTI/CH: except CW mode) and 93 (MULTI/CH:  
CW mode).  
Tuning control  
Still operates in TF-SET mode.  
MULTI/CH  
control  
Still operates for changing setting  
modes.  
[ENT]  
Still operates for character  
selection and for changing setting  
modes.  
[M.IN]  
MICROPHONE KEYS  
Still operates for character  
selection and for changing setting  
modes. Also still operates for  
setting up scan groups (press  
and hold).  
There are 4 microphone PF (Programmable Function)  
keys: [PF1] , [PF2] , [PF3], and [PF4]. You can  
assign your own desired functions to these 4 keys  
via Menu Nos. 94 to 97. You can also reprogram the  
Mic [UP]/ [DWN] keys with your desired function by  
accessing Menu Nos. 99 and 98.  
[SCAN]  
Still operates in TF-SET mode  
(in VFO mode) during Menu  
mode when the Mic key paddle  
operation is ON.  
Assign one of the following functions to each PF key.  
Selecting “OFF” assigns no function to the PF key.  
Mic [UP]  
No.  
Function  
Menu No.  
00 ~ 99  
RX ANT  
ATT  
Remark  
Still operates in TF-SET mode  
(in VFO mode) during Menu  
mode when the Mic key paddle  
operation is ON.  
Mic [DWN]  
00 ~ 99  
120  
121  
122  
123  
[A/B]  
[M/V]  
ANT1/2  
PRE  
[SPLIT]  
Band direct key  
[M>V]  
Press and hold: enter  
the level setup mode.  
124  
VOX  
[LSB/USB]  
[CW/FSK]  
Press and hold: enter  
the level setup mode.  
125  
126  
127  
PROC  
SEND  
AT  
Still operates to change between  
FM and FM Narrow (press and  
hold).  
[FM/AM]  
Press and hold: start  
the antenna tuning.  
[DATA]  
[MHz]  
128  
129  
130  
CAR  
MIC  
Still operates to cancel Frequency  
Lock (press and hold).  
TX-MONI  
[FINE]  
[CWT]  
[MULT/CH] default  
(except CW mode)  
131  
132  
133  
PWR  
DELAY  
KEY  
Still operates to turn AGC ON/  
OFF (press and hold).  
[MULT/CH] default (CW  
mode)  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
No.  
Function  
DRV  
Remark  
No.  
Function  
Remark  
Selected ANT: ANT  
OUT on/off  
The lower meter when  
transmitting  
134  
202  
VOICE3  
135  
136  
137  
138  
METER  
LSB/USB  
CW/FSK  
FM/AM  
203  
204  
205  
MONITOR  
TX TUNE 1  
TX TUNE 2  
Mic [PF4] default  
Press and hold: REV  
Press and hold: NAR  
The input voice from  
the data terminal is  
transmitted  
206  
DATA SEND  
When the CW Morse  
decoder is ON,  
139  
DATA  
press and hold: enter  
the threshold level  
adjustment mode.  
207  
208  
DWN  
UP  
Mic [DWN] default  
Mic [UP] default  
Emergency frequency  
call (K type only)  
209  
EMERGENCY  
140  
141  
F.LOCK  
FINE  
OFF  
No function  
Press and hold: enter  
the bandwidth display.  
142  
143  
144  
IF FIL  
NB  
Note:  
◆
Assigned key functions may not work, depending on the  
setting.  
Press and hold: enter  
the level setup mode.  
◆
[AGC SEL] can be used in modes other than FM mode, and  
can set a step level of the chosen AGC time constant (FAST/  
SLOW).  
Press and hold: enter  
the level setup mode.  
NR  
◆
[TONE SEL] can also be used in FM mode while TONE or  
CTCSS is ON,  
145  
146  
AUTO NOTCH  
BC  
Press and hold: NOTCH  
WIDE.  
147  
NOTCH  
DSP RX EQUALIZER  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
SPLIT  
TF-SET  
A=B  
Mic [PF2] default  
Mic [PF1] default  
Mic [PF3] default  
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO  
Use Menu No. 37 to change the receiver frequency  
responses of the target signal. You can select one  
from 8 different receiver profiles including the default  
flat response. Selecting any of the following items  
A/B  
M/V  
from the Menu causes “  
display.  
” to appear on the  
M.IN  
M>V  
Q-M.IN  
Q-MR  
MHz  
SCAN  
MENU  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
RX  
•
Off (oFF):  
Slightly attenuates (1 kHz or higher audio  
frequencies).  
•
•
High boost 1 (hb1):  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies.  
High boost 2 (hb2):  
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies but lower  
audio frequency attenuation is less than High  
boost1 (hb1).  
•
Formant pass (FP):  
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies  
outside the normal voice frequency range.  
•
•
Bass boost 1 (bb1):  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies.  
RIT  
[RIT] default  
[XIT] default  
[CL] default  
Bass boost 2 (bb2):  
XIT  
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies but higher  
audio frequency attenuation is less than Bass  
boost1 (bb1).  
CL  
Press and hold: enter  
the tone setup mode.  
168  
AGC/T  
•
•
Flat (FLAT):  
The flat frequency response.  
169  
170  
200  
201  
AGC OFF  
CW T.  
User (U):  
Reserved for the ARCP software. Off is  
programmed at the factory as a default.  
VOICE1  
VOICE2  
[PF A] default  
[PF B] default  
Note: The RX Equalizer can be set for each mode.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
RX MONITOR  
RX monitor temporarily disables the squelch function  
to monitor the current frequency activities.  
Note:  
◆
When using a transverter, not all the functions of this  
transceiver are available.  
◆
When turning the transverter ON, the frequency entry history  
is cleared, thus you cannot use the frequency entry history  
function.  
To use the RX Monitor function, first assign the  
function to a PF key (either on the front panel or the  
microphone).  
◆
When using an antenna tuner in the IN state and the  
transverter is turned ON, the antenna tuner is forced to the  
THRU state.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No.  
87 to 99.  
TRANSMISSION OUTPUT POWER  
If Menu No. 56 is set to “1” {above}, the transceiver  
automatically decreases the output power to 5  
watts. However, if you do not wish to decrease the  
output power, access Menu No. 56 and select “2”; the  
transceiver will transmit at full power.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “203”.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
4 Press the assigned [PF] key.  
•
While pressing [PF], the speaker unmutes.  
Note: You are responsible for your transmission output power  
settings.  
TIME-OUT TIMER  
TX MONITOR  
The Time-out Timer limits the time of each  
transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long  
accidental transmission.  
TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going  
transmission sound. This is convenient when you  
want to check the modulation sound quality of the  
transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK  
signal that the transceiver is transmitting.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 55.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “oFF”,  
1 Press and hold [PWR (TX MONI)].  
“3”, “5”, “10”, “20”, or “30” minutes.  
•
The current TX monitor setting appears on the  
sub-display.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the monitor  
sound level from “oFF”, and “1” to “20”.  
TRANSVERTER  
3 Press [CLR] to store the selected TX monitor level.  
If you have a transverter that converts the TS-590SG  
operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can  
use this TS-590SG transceiver as a transverter exciter.  
Consult the instruction manual that came with the  
transverter for interfacing to the TS-590SG transceiver.  
Note:  
◆
We recommend you use headphones when you monitor  
SSB, AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.  
◆
The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the  
TX monitor function. Use the TX sidetone function to monitor  
CW transmissions (Menu Nos. 06 and 40).  
FREQUENCY DISPLAY  
1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2, RX  
ANT, or DRV connector of the TS-590SG.  
TX POWER  
2 Select the exciter operating frequency on the  
You can adjust the transmission output power by  
pressing [PWR (TX MONI)] and turning the MULTI/  
CH control. If more precise power adjustment is  
required, access Menu No. 54 and select “on”. When  
this function is activated, the power adjustment steps  
change as shown in the table below.  
transceiver.  
•
The transverter will use this frequency as the  
reference for converting frequencies.  
3 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 56.  
Mode  
Menu No. 54 OFF Menu No. 54 ON  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “1”.  
SSB/ CW/  
FM/ FSK  
5 ~ 100 W  
in steps of 5  
5 ~ 100 W  
in steps of 1  
•
The output power is automatically set to the  
lowest power for that frequency (default). Refer  
to “TX POWER” {below}.  
5 ~ 25 W  
in steps of 5  
5 ~ 25 W  
in steps of 1  
AM  
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
6 Press [ENT], then set the target converting  
Note: The output power settings are stored independently for  
HF and 50 MHz. As shown in the table above, you can also  
store different output power settings for AM/ DATA and other  
modes for HF bands and the 50 MHz band.  
frequency using the numeric keys.  
7 Press [ENT] to complete the entry.  
•
The transceiver displays the target transverter  
frequency instead of the actual operating  
frequency.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
ADJUSTING THE TRANSMIT OUTPUT POWER  
FOR TX TUNE  
While in TX Tune, press [PWR] to turn the  
transmission output power adjusting mode for TX Tune  
ON/OFF.  
TX TUNE  
The TX Tune function allows you to adjust the antenna  
length, or tune the linear amplifier while transmitting a  
continuous CW signal.  
To use the TX Tune function, first assign the function  
to a PF key (either the front panel or Microphone PF  
keys).  
You can adjust the transmission output power of TX  
Tune by turning the MULT/CH control while in TX Tune  
mode.  
Method 1:  
• The TX Tune mode ON/OFF status is stored.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Menu No.  
from 87 to 99.  
The following procedure shows how to set the  
transmission output power of TX Tune while in RX  
mode.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “204”  
(TX TUNE 1).  
1 Press [PWR (TX MONI)] while receiving to enter  
the transmission output power adjusting mode.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
2 Press the assigned [PF] key, “204” (TX TUNE 1)  
or “205” (TX TUNE 2), to enter the transmission  
output power adjusting mode for TX Tune.  
4 Press the assigned [PF] key.  
•
The transceiver automatically switches to CW  
mode, and transmits a continuous carrier.  
The transceiver selects the SWR meter function  
automatically.  
• “T.PWR” appears.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the  
•
•
While in TX Tune mode, most keys are disabled.  
transmission output power for TX Tune.  
The default output power is configured as  
10 watts. However, you can adjust the output  
power using [PWR (TX MONI)] and the MULTI/  
CH control if necessary. The transceiver stores  
the new output power setting when you exit the  
TX Tune mode.  
4 Press [PWR (TX MONI)] or [CLR] to exit the  
transmission output power adjusting mode for TX  
tune.  
Note:  
◆
While in the transmission output power adjusting mode for  
TX Tune, you can start TX Tune by pressing the PF key to  
which [TX TUNE 1] or [TX TUNE 2] is assigned.  
5 Press the assigned [PF] key again to exit the TX  
◆
When you finish TX Tune, the transmission output power  
adjusting mode for TX Tune exits.  
Tune mode.  
Method 2:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Menu No.  
from 87 to 99.  
QUICK DATA TRANSFER  
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and  
conveniently transfer the reception frequency and  
mode to another compatible transceiver. Compatible  
transceivers include:  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “205”  
(TX TUNE 2).  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
TS-590SG/ 590S TS-480HX/ SAT TS-2000/X  
4 Press and hold the assigned [PF] key.  
TS-570S/ 570D  
TS-870S  
TS-990S  
•
The transceiver automatically switches to CW  
mode, and transmits a continuous carrier.  
The transceiver selects the SWR meter function  
automatically.  
Data transfer could be useful while contesting. A  
spotting station that is searching for new contest  
multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to the  
running (main) station.  
•
•
While in TX Tune mode, most keys are disabled.  
The default output power is configured as  
10 watts. However, you can adjust the output  
power using [PWR (TX MONI)] and the MULTI/  
CH control if necessary. The transceiver stores  
the new output power setting when you exit the  
TX Tune mode.  
SETTING UP  
■ Equipment Needed  
In addition to a compatible transceiver, to transfer  
to a TS-990S, TS-590SG, TS-590S, TS-480HX/  
SAT, TS-2000/X, TS-570S/D, or TS-870S, you  
must have 1 cross-wired cable with a DB-9 female  
connector at both ends.  
5 Release the assigned [PF] key to exit the TX Tune  
mode.  
■ Connections  
For diagrams on how to connect the 2 transceivers,  
refer to “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL  
EQUIPMENT” {page 69}.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
USING QUICK TRANSFER  
When connecting with another TS-990S, TS-590SG,  
TS-590S, TS-480HX/ SAT, TS-2000/X, TS-570S/D/SG/  
DG, or TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud  
rate on each transceiver.  
COMPUTER CONTROL  
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you  
can change the computer into an electronic console  
from which you can remotely control functions of the  
transceiver. This capability makes remote operation  
of your transceiver possible from across the room,  
from another room, or when coupled with other  
commercially available products and where lawful,  
from another city, state, or country via an internet  
connection.  
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.  
■ Transferring Data  
The TS-590SG transceiver works as the Master,  
sending data to the Slave transceiver.  
SETTING UP  
1 Turn ON the Transfer function of each  
transceiver.  
■ Equipment Needed  
•
On the TS-590SG, access Menu No. 64 and  
select “on”. For the compatible transceiver,  
refer to the instruction manual that came  
with the transceiver.  
When connecting the TS-590SG to a PC USB port:  
•
•
•
•
USB 2.0 conformed (base) port  
Commercially available AB type USB 2.0 cable  
Transceiver control application  
2 On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an  
operating frequency and mode.  
Pre-installed virtual COM port driver, on the  
PC. (The driver is available at the website listed  
below.)  
3 On the Master, press [Q-M.IN].  
•
The displayed data is stored in Quick  
Memory channel 0 on the Master and  
transferred to the Slave.  
When connecting the TS-590SG to a PC COM  
port:  
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset  
frequency is added to the reception frequency to be  
transferred.  
•
•
A PC equipped with a COM (serial) port  
1 straight cable. This cable must have a DB-9  
female connector at one end, and a DB-9 or a  
DB-25 female connector that mates with the  
COM port of your computer at the other end.  
■ Receiving Data  
The TS-590SG transceiver works as the Slave,  
receiving data from the Master transceiver. The  
Slave can receive data using either Quick Memory  
channel 0 or the VFO.  
•
Transceiver control application  
To create your programs, access the KENWOOD  
website and download the TS-590SG command  
reference documents (pdf format) for details:  
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each  
transceiver.  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.html  
•
On the TS-590SG access Menu No. 64 and  
select “on”. For the compatible transceiver,  
refer to the instruction manual that came  
with the transceiver.  
■ Connections  
To connect the transceiver to a computer, refer  
to the diagram in “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL  
EQUIPMENT” {page 69}.  
2 On the Slave, access Menu No. 65 and select  
either “oFF” (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or “on”  
(the VFO).  
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to a computer,  
switch OFF the power to both the transceiver and the  
computer.  
•
The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).  
3 On the Master, perform the appropriate  
operation to send data.  
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS  
In order to control the transceiver with the computer,  
you must first choose the communication parameters.  
•
For the correct method, refer to the  
instruction manual that came with the  
transceiver.  
Note:  
1 On the computer, configure your transceiver control  
application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and  
no parity.  
◆
If you always use the TS-590SG for receiving only,  
activate the TX Inhibit function via Menu No. 66, to avoid  
unintentional transmission.  
2 On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate  
◆
When the Slave receives data using the VFO  
programmed with a simplex frequency, the received data  
replaces the data on both VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT  
and XIT are set to OFF.  
via Menu No. 67 (COM port) or 68 (USB port).  
•
The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit for  
Menu No. 67 and 115200 bps and 1 stop bit for  
Menu No. 68.  
◆
When the Slave receives data using the VFOs  
programmed with split frequencies, the received data  
replaces the data only on the TX side of the VFO. On  
the Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is not changed.  
•
Only a baud rate of 4800 bps uses 2 stop bits.  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
4 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to  
implement the change.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
EXTERNAL AUDIO SETTINGS  
COM Terminal  
PC  
RxD  
TxD  
CTS  
RTS  
GND  
TxD (stopped)  
RxD (stopped)  
PSQ  
■ Selecting a Data Transmission Line  
Depending on how you connect your transceiver  
to a PC, you will need to set a data transmission  
line type. Access Menu No. 69 and select “ACC2”  
(default) or “USB”.  
PSQ/  
PKS  
PKS  
GND  
■ Audio Level Settings  
Normal PC commands (ARCP, ARHP, or SKY  
COMMAND SYSTEM II) will not work when this  
function is turned ON.  
You can set the input and output audio levels of  
an ACC2 connection via Menu Nos. 73 and 74,  
and the input and output audio levels of a USB  
connection via Menu Nos. 71 and 72. Each setting  
has a range of 0 to 9, with a default setting of 4.  
•
When operating the TS-590SG as a base station,  
using VoIP or similar software, set Menu No. 84 to  
“SQL”.  
At the same time, if you are using CTCSS, set  
Menu No. 82 to “2” and confirm that the frequency  
is not already in use and is not causing any  
interference.  
Additionally, you can mix beep tones, the sidetone,  
and the Voice guide for an ACC2/USB audio output  
by accessing Menu No. 75 and selecting “on”  
(whereby the PC will confirm the sounds being  
output from the transceiver speaker).  
•
•
When turning the power OFF and the VoIP  
software misdetects a busy signal, set Menu No.  
83 to “OPEN”.  
SELECTING THE AUDIO SOURCE FOR  
TRANSMISSION IN DATA MODE  
In Data mode, you can select to use the microphone  
or the data communication input signal from the ACC2  
connector or USB connector as the input signal that  
will be transmitted by operating the front panel SEND  
key, microphone PTT (SS) , pin 13 (SS) of the ACC2  
connector, or pin 3 (SS) of the REMOTE connector.  
When not using the USB terminal, besides a serial  
cable, create and connect a sound input/output  
cable. In this case when connecting to sound  
equipment and the audio output level is too high,  
change the level setting in Menu No. 73.  
CONTROLLING THE TS-590SG FROM A PC  
If a PC and the TS-590SG are connected using a  
serial cable {page 71}, you can remotely control the  
functions of the TS-590SG from a PC. Download the  
free ARCP-590G software from the following URL:  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 70.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select “FRONT”  
or “REAR”.  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software _  
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
download.htm  
l
The detailed remote controlling instructions are  
available in accompanied documents and help file.  
CHANGING THE SIGNAL FOR THE COM  
TERMINAL  
Send the PSQ (SQL control signal) and PKS signal  
through the COM terminal.  
REMOTELY CONTROLLING THE TS-590SG ON  
THE NETWORK  
In addition to the ARCP-590G program, the ARHP-  
590G program can also be downloaded from  
the above site. This ARHP-590G program is an  
ARCP-590G host program that allows a user who  
is connected in the network to remotely control the  
TS-590SG transceiver from a distant location. If you  
make interface cables that transfer the audio between  
the TS-590SG transceiver and the PC on the host  
transceiver, you can receive signals and transmit  
your voice over the network. For detailed information,  
download the ARHP-590G program and consult the  
accompanied documents.  
1 Turn the transceiver power OFF.  
2 Press [FM/AM (FM-N)] + [ ].  
•
“PSQ/PKS” momentarily appears, and the RTS/  
CTS signal is replaced with the PSQ/PKS signal  
at the COM terminal.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to return to normal operation.  
“CTS/RTS” momentarily appears.  
•
The operation of the output signal for each setting is  
as follows:  
Note: The ARHP-590G does not support voice communication.  
In order to use voice communications, you must also use  
universal VoIP software.  
COM Terminal  
TxD  
PC  
RxD  
TxD  
CTS  
RTS  
GND  
RxD  
CTS/  
RTS  
RTS  
CTS  
GND  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
Note:  
OPTIONAL VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE &  
STORAGE UNIT  
◆
Pressing [ ] cancels the recording in progress and clears  
the memory channel.  
◆
The audio source for messages is normally input from  
the Mic, but using a personal computer, you can record  
messages that are input from the rear terminal as the audio  
source. Refer to the PC Command list for more details.  
The optional VGS-1 unit allows you to record 30  
second (maximum) voice messages to memory  
channels 1 and 2, and 15 second (maximum) voice  
messages to memory channels 3 and 4. After  
recording a message via your transceiver microphone,  
you can then transmit those recorded messages. It  
also announces the key function and frequencies each  
time you press a key (Voice announcement). Since  
the incoming reception signal is processed in digital  
data in the transceiver, the VGS-1 can be configured  
to constantly store the incoming audio signals in the  
background. If you wish, you can store the last 30  
seconds of the incoming signal to the VGS-1 for the  
later playback (Constant recording).  
MESSAGE PLAYBACK  
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, 3, or  
4 to check or send them. It is also possible to make  
a longer message by consecutively playing back the  
messages of more than one channel, linking them  
together.  
You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked  
message by using the Repeat function. To switch  
this function ON, access Menu No. 62 and select “on”  
(default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval time  
in Menu No. 63 (default is 10 seconds).  
For information on how to install the VGS-1 unit, refer  
to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 76}.  
Note:  
◆
Pressing [ ] cancels the playback in progress.  
RECORDING MESSAGES  
This section explains how to record a single message.  
◆
The settings in Menu Nos. 56 and 57 are shared with CW  
Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY”  
{page 35}.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
■ Checking Messages  
•
Select a mode that you wish to transmit.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
2 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)] to record the  
message for channel 1.  
•
Select the same mode when you recorded  
the message.  
•
BT in Morse code sounds and “AP 1 –” appears.  
•
Confirm that the VOX function is OFF.  
2 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)], depending on which  
channel you want to check.  
•
To quit recording your message, press [CLR].  
•
For example, “AP 1– – –” appears while  
playing back the message in channel 1.  
3 Press [MIC (CAR)], then turn the MULTI/CH  
control to adjust the microphone gain so that the  
voice input level is not beyond the ALC level zone.  
•
•
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].  
When Menu No. 62 is "oFF", press and  
hold the current playback channel key to  
repeatedly play back the message saved  
to that key (A display such as “AP 1111”  
appears for the channel key you pressed.).  
To cancel the playback, press any channel  
key or [CLR].  
4 Hold [CH1 (REC)] and speak into your  
microphone.  
•
Four channels are available for recording  
messages. Press [CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)],  
or [RX/4 (REC)] in place of [CH1 (REC)], in  
steps 3 and 4 to record the message on a  
different channel.  
3 To play back another message in sequence,  
press the corresponding key ([CH1 (REC)],  
[CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)])  
while the first message is being played.  
•
If Constant Recording is active, [RX/4 (REC)] is  
unavailable for message recording.  
5 Release the key when you have finished recording  
your message.  
•
Repeat playback, by pressing and holding  
the keys, does not work during consecutive  
message playback.  
•
•
•
When the maximum recording time passes,  
recording automatically stops.  
The contents of the channel is overwritten with  
the new message.  
•
Up to 4 channels can be queued.  
■ Sending Messages  
“WRITING” appears while the transceiver is  
storing the message data to the VGS-1 flash  
memory.  
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.  
•
Select the same mode when you recorded  
the message.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to record a message on  
another channel.  
2 Press [VOX (LEV)] to switch VOX ON or OFF.  
If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.  
3 Press [SEND] or hold Mic [PTT].  
•
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
Note:  
◆
4 Press [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)], [CH3  
(REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)], depending on which  
channel you want to use.  
While Menu No. 61 is ON, you cannot use channel 4 (RX/4)  
to record and playback a voice message. However, the  
message in channel 4 is not erased. When the Constant  
Recording function is turned OFF (Menu No. 55 is OFF), you  
can playback the message on channel 4.  
•
For example, “AP 1– – –” appears while  
playing back the message in channel 1.  
◆
While “ ” is not displayed, such as the VGS-1 is playing  
back a message or the Voice Guide function is working, the  
Constant Recording function temporarily pauses.  
•
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].  
5 To play back another message in sequence,  
press the corresponding key ([CH1 (REC)],  
[CH2 (REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)])  
while the first message is being played.  
◆
◆
When you record a new message to the VGS-1, the 30  
second Constant Recording buffer is cleared.  
You cannot transmit a stored audio signal that is recorded  
with the Constant Recording function.  
•
Up to 4 channels can be queued.  
VOICE GUIDE  
6 If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,  
When the optional VGS-1 is installed, each time  
you change the transceiver mode such as VFO A/  
B or Memory Recall, the transceiver automatically  
announces the new mode. In addition, you can  
program each [PF] key which makes the transceiver  
announce the displayed information by pressing it.  
press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].  
•
To adjust the input and output levels for the  
Mic Gain and Speech Processor, adjust  
them in sending the messages. (The levels  
for the Mic transmission and voice message  
transmission are stored separately.)  
The tables below indicate the transceiver  
announcements when the settings are changed.  
Additionally, pressing the [PF] key will perform specific  
announcements depending on whether VOICE1,  
VOICE2, or VOICE3 is selected.  
■ Erasing a Recorded Message  
1 Press and hold [CH1 (REC)], [CH2 (REC)],  
[CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)] to select the  
message you want to erase.  
•
“AP n – –” appears, where “n” represents the  
channel number.  
VOICE1:  
•
When VOICE 1 auto announcement is ON (“1” or  
“2”) (Menu No. 11), the transceiver settings are  
automatically announced any time the settings are  
changed.  
2 To erase the recorded message, press and hold  
the same key as in step 1 ([CH1 (REC)], [CH2  
(REC)], [CH3 (REC)], or [RX/4 (REC)]) while  
simultaneously pressing [CLR].  
1: The frequency is announced in changing the  
memory channel.  
•
A beep sounds and the message is erased.  
2: The Memory Name is announced when the  
memory channel is changed. (If a Memory Name is  
not set, the frequency is announced.)  
■ Changing Inter-message Interval Time  
For repetitive message playback, you can change  
the interval between each series of messages.  
Use Menu No. 63, and select the interval time in  
the range of 0 to 60 seconds.  
•
•
Pressing [PF] will announce the currently displayed  
settings.  
During a voice announcement, pressing [PF] will  
cancel the announcement.  
■ Changing Message Playback Volume  
Operations using VOICE1  
Turning the AF control does not change the volume  
for the message playback. To change the message  
playback volume , access Menu No. 07 to select  
the playback volume level from “1” to “20” or “oFF”.  
Operation  
Announcement  
IF filter selection  
(High Cut)  
“High” + Setting value1  
CONSTANT RECORDING  
IF filter selection  
(Low Cut)  
IF filter selection (Width) “Width” + Setting value1  
IF filter selection (Shift) “Shift” + Setting value1  
“Low” + Setting value1  
By utilizing the digital recording capability of the  
VGS-1, you can configure the VGS-1 to store the last  
30 seconds of communications (transmitted signals  
and received signals when the squelch opens). You  
can play back the last 30 seconds of communications  
to confirm what has been heard.  
Tone frequency  
selection/ when tone ID “Tone” + Setting value1  
scanning is complete  
To activate the Constant Recording function, access  
Menu No. 61 and select “on” (default). “ ” appears  
and the transceiver starts recording the signal in the  
background. When you press and hold [RX/4 (REC)],  
the VGS-1 stores the last 30 seconds (maximum) of  
the reception audio signal to the flash memory. While  
writing the audio signal data to the flash memory,  
“WRITING” appears.  
CTCSS frequency  
selection/ when CTCSS “CTCSS” + Setting value1  
ID scanning is complete  
NR1 level setup  
NR2 level setup  
“NR1” + Setting value1  
“NR2” + Setting value1  
To play back the stored reception signal, press [RX/4  
(REC)]. To quit, press [CLR].  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
Status Settings using VOICE1  
Status Announcement  
Press [ ]  
Operation  
Announcement  
“Memory scan group” +  
Group No. + “Off/On”  
“VFO” + (“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Frequency (+ “X/R/XR” +  
RIT/XIT Frequency)4  
• When selecting a  
group number, the  
group number and “Off/  
On” is announced.  
While in VFO mode  
Memory scan group  
setup  
(“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Press [A/B (A=B)]  
Frequency (+ “X/R/XR” +  
Changing VFO A or B  
while in VFO mode  
RIT/XIT Frequency)4  
• When the settings are  
changed, only “Off/On”  
is announced.  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
(TF-SET ON/OFF is  
stored)  
“VFO” + “Scan” + “Group”  
+ Section defined No. +  
“Off/On”  
Press [1.8] ~ [50] or  
[GENE]  
Press [LSB/USB]/ [CW/  
FSK (REV)]/ [FM/AM  
(FM-N)]  
Changing the frequency  
while in VFO mode  
Changing the mode  
while in VFO mode  
Frequency (+ “X/R/XR” +  
RIT/XIT Frequency)4  
• Announces when  
• When selecting the  
section defined number,  
the section defined  
number and “Off/On” is  
announced.  
Program/VFO scanning  
section setup  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
• When the settings are  
changed, only “Off/On”  
is announced.  
“Channel” + Channel  
number + (“S” +)1  
Press [M/V]  
While in Memory  
channel mode  
“VOX gain” + Setting  
value1  
Frequency (+ “X/R/XR” +  
VOX gain level setup  
RIT/XIT Frequency)4  
Speech processor input “Processor in” + Setting  
level setup  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
value1  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
• Announces when  
Speech processor  
output level setup  
“Processor out” + Setting  
value1  
Changing the memory  
channel while in Memory  
channel mode  
Changing the mode  
while in Memory channel  
mode  
Noise Blanker “1” or “2” “Noise blanker” “1” or “2” +  
level setup  
Setting value1  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
“Mic gain” + Setting  
value1  
Mic Gain adjustment  
(“S” +)1 Frequency (+  
“X/R/XR” + RIT/XIT  
Frequency)4  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
Hold or Release [TF-  
SET]  
TF-SET ON/OFF while in  
Memory scroll mode  
“Keying Speed” + Setting  
value1  
Keying Speed selection  
TX power adjustment  
VOX Delay time setup  
“TX power” + Setting  
value1  
“VOX delay” + Setting  
value1  
Editing the channel  
name  
(While in character  
selection)  
Selected character  
or symbol. (“@”, “/”  
and “Space” are not  
announced.)  
Break-in Delay time  
setup  
“Break-in delay” + Setting  
value1  
TX Monitor volume  
adjustment  
Carrier level adjustment “Carrier” + Setting value1  
“TX monitor” + Setting  
value1  
“Quick memory” +  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Press [Q-MR]  
While in Quick memory  
mode  
Frequency (+ “X/R/XR” +  
RIT/XIT Frequency)4  
AGC constant time AGC  
“Fast” + Setting value1  
setting (FAST)  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 “A/B” +  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the memory  
channel while in Quick  
memory mode  
AGC constant time AGC  
“Slow” + Setting value1  
setting (SLOW)  
Frequency (+ “X/R/XR” +  
RIT/XIT Frequency)4  
“Menu” + Menu number +  
While in Menu mode  
Setting value1  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
While in transmission  
“T” + “Power” + Setting  
output power adjusting  
value1  
Empty Channel:  
“Memory in” + Channel  
number + “Blank”  
Stored Channel:  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
mode for TX Tune  
Press [M.IN]  
While in Memory scroll  
mode  
While in threshold level  
“CW” + “THR” + Setting  
adjustment mode for the  
value1  
CW Morse decoder  
1
During continuous operation, only the setting value is  
announced.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
Status  
Announcement  
Status  
Announcement  
Empty Channel:  
Channel number +  
“Blank”  
Stored Channel:  
Channel number +  
(“S” +)1 Frequency  
Press and hold  
[METER (DRV)]  
Changing the Antenna  
output  
Drive output enabled:  
“A” + “On”  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the channel  
number while in Memory  
scroll mode  
Drive output disabled:  
“A” + “Off”  
Press [FM/AM (FM-N)]  
+ [ ]  
Changing the output  
signal for the PC control  
terminal 2  
CTS/RTS Output Mode:  
“CTSRTS on”  
PSQ/PKS Output Mode:  
“PSQPKS on”  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
Press [ENT]  
While in frequency/  
memory channel number  
entry mode  
Press [A/B (A=B)] +  
[ ], then turn the  
MULTI/CH control  
“Enter”  
“VFO reset?”  
“Full reset?”  
Press [ENT], then  
press the number keys  
Enter the number while  
in frequency/ memory  
channel number entry  
mode  
Reset confirmation  
during VFO reset2  
Press [A/B (A=B)] +  
[ ], then turn the  
MULTI/CH control  
Entered number  
Reset confirmation  
Press [ENT], then turn  
the MULTI/CH control  
Displaying the frequency  
history while in  
during Full reset2  
1
2
3
Announced when operating in Split-frequency mode.  
Frequency  
Announced even when the auto Voice announcement is OFF.  
When auto Voice announcement is ON, various configuration  
images appear on the display. When modifications are made to  
these settings, the new setting is announced.  
Frequency entry mode  
Press the number keys  
4
“X/R/XR” + RIT/XIT frequency are announced when either RIT  
or XIT is ON. "X/R/XR" are announced as “X” if the only XIT is  
ON, “R” if the only RIT is ON, and “XR” if both XIT and RIT are  
ON.  
“Enter” + Entered  
number  
Enter the number while  
in memory scroll channel  
number entry mode  
“Auto” + Channel number  
+ Frequency  
• Announces when  
Press [LSB/USB] + [ ]  
While in Auto setting  
mode  
VOICE2:  
•
Pressing [PF] will announce the current state of  
the S meter/ RF meter.  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
•
During a voice announcement, pressing [PF] will  
Turn the MULTI/CH  
control  
Changing the channel  
number while in Auto  
setting mode  
Channel number +  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
cancel the announcement.  
VOICE2 Announcements  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
S meter  
PWR meter  
Dot  
position  
Dot  
position  
Press the number keys  
Announcement  
Announcement  
Frequency  
• Announces when  
Menu No. 11 is “1” or “2”  
Changing the frequency/  
mode while in Auto  
setting mode  
0
1 ~ 3  
4 ~ 5  
6
S 0  
S 1  
0
P 0  
P 5  
1 ~ 3  
Press and hold [FINE]  
Turning the frequency  
lock ON/OFF  
S 2  
4 ~ 6  
P 10  
P 25  
P 50  
P 75  
P 100  
“Frequency lock” +  
“On”/“Off”  
S 3  
7 ~ 12  
13 ~ 18  
19 ~ 23  
24 ~ 30  
7 ~ 8  
9
S 4  
Press [RIT] or [XIT]  
While in RIT/XIT  
adjusting mode  
“X/R/XR” + RIT/XIT  
Frequency 4  
S 5  
10 ~ 11  
12  
S 6  
ALC meter: “A”  
SWR meter: “R”  
COMP meter: “C”  
S 7  
Press [METER (DRV)]  
Changing the meter type  
13 ~ 14  
15  
S 8  
S 9  
Press and hold  
[METER (DRV)]  
Changing the Drive  
output  
Drive output enabled:  
“D” + “On”  
Drive output disabled:  
“D” + “Off”  
16 ~ 19  
20  
10 dB  
20 dB  
30 dB  
40 dB  
50 dB  
60 dB  
21 ~ 24  
25  
26 ~ 29  
30  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
VOICE3:  
EMERGENCY CALL (K TYPE ONLY)  
•
Pressing [PF] will announce the current state of  
the SWR meter/ ALC meter/ COMP meter.  
Section 97.401(d) of the regulations governing  
amateur radio in the United States permit emergency  
amateur communications on 5167.5 kHz by stations  
in or within 92.6 km of the state of Alaska. This  
frequency is for use only when the immediate safety  
of human life and/or property are threatened, and is  
never to be used for routine communications.  
•
During a voice announcement, pressing [PF] will  
cancel the announcement.  
VOICE3 Announcements  
SWR meter  
ALC meter  
Press [EMERGENCY] to change to the Emergency  
channel (5167.5 kHz/ USB).  
Dot  
position  
Dot  
position  
Announcement  
Announcement  
•
•
[EMERGENCY] can be programmed onto a PF  
0
R
0
1
A 0  
A 1  
key.  
1
R 1.0  
R 1.5  
R 2.0  
R 3.0  
R 5.0  
R OVER  
When entering Emergency mode, “EMERGENCY”  
momentarily appears on the sub-display.  
2 ~ 6  
7 ~ 11  
12 ~ 16  
17 ~ 24  
25 ~ 30  
2
A 2  
~
~
Note:  
◆
RIT/XIT turns OFF automatically when entering Emergency  
mode.  
13  
14  
15 ~  
A 13  
A 14  
A OVER  
◆
The transceiver will not switch to the Emergency channel  
if you are using the constant recorder and are either  
transmitting, receiving a voice call, or receiving a CW call.  
COMP meter  
Dot  
position  
CROSSBAND REPEATER  
Announcement  
If you have a KENWOOD FM transceiver (K type)  
with a 6 pin mini DIN connector, you can set up the  
TS-590SG transceiver and the FM transceiver as a  
crossband repeater. The FM transceiver will receive  
signals you transmit from the additional VHF or UHF  
transceiver when both transceivers are set with the  
same frequency. The signal is then routed to the  
TS-590SG transceiver and retransmitted on the  
frequency you have set on the TS-590SG transceiver.  
Likewise, signals received on the TS-590SG  
transceiver are routed to the FM transceiver and  
retransmitted to the transceiver you have with you,  
allowing you to hear the received call in a distant  
location.  
0
C 0 dB  
C 10 dB  
C 20 dB  
C OVER  
1 ~ 10  
11 ~ 20  
21 ~ 30  
■ Voice Guide Announcement Volume  
Turning the AF control does not change the volume  
for the Voice Guide announcement. To change the  
announcement volume , access Menu No. 08 and  
select the volume level from “1” to “20” or “oFF”.  
■ Voice Guide Announcement Speed  
To interface between the TS-590SG transceiver and  
FM transceiver (K type), refer to “CROSSBAND  
REPEATER” {page 75}.  
If you feel the Voice Announcement speed is  
too slow or too fast, you can adjust the Voice  
Announcement speed. Five different speeds can  
be configured. Access Menu No. 09 and select “0”  
to “4”, where 0 is the slowest speed and 4 is the  
fastest. The default speed is 1.  
Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels  
of both transceivers (TS-590SG and FM transceiver) must be  
adjusted properly so that no background noise can be heard; the  
transmission is controlled by monitoring the squelch status only.  
OPERATION  
■ Voice Guide Announcement Language  
The crossband repeater function uses 2 frequency  
bands to receive and transmit signals. When a signal  
is received on one band, it is retransmitted on the  
other band.  
If you mistakenly change the announcement  
language, you can change it back to English by  
accessing Menu No. 10 and selecting “EN”.  
1 Select a transmission/ reception VHF or UHF  
frequency on the FM transceiver.  
2 Confirm the PTT icon is visible on the crossband  
repeater frequency on the FM transceiver.  
3 Select the same frequency for the terminal  
transceiver.  
4 Select a HF/ 50 MHz frequency on the TS-590SG  
transceiver.  
5 Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both the  
TS-590SG and FM transceivers mute.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 12  
6 On the TS-590SG, press [MENU], then turn  
For more detailed information on the DX  
MULTI/CH control to select Menu Nos. 80 and 81.  
PacketCluster operation of the TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-  
D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-D700(A/E), refer to their  
respective instruction manuals.  
7 Press [M.IN] to select “on”.  
•
When the TS-590SG transceiver’s squelch  
opens, the FM transceiver simultaneously  
retransmits the incoming audio signal on the  
VHF or UHF frequency.  
Note: The firmware of the TM-D700(A/E) transceiver must be  
version G2.0 or later to use the DX PacketCluster Tune function.  
•
When the FM transceiver’s squelch opens, the  
TS-590SG transceiver retransmits the incoming  
audio signal on the HF/ 50 MHz frequency.  
SKY COMMAND SYSTEM II  
Sky Command System II allows you to remotely  
control the TS-590SG transceiver from a separate  
location.  
8 Access Menu Nos. 73 and 74 and press [M.IN]/  
[SCAN (SG.SEL)] to adjust the input/ output audio  
level.  
If you have more than 2 TH-D7A/ TH-D72(A/E)/  
TM-D710/G(A/E)/ TM-V71A + RC-D710/ TM-D700A  
transceivers, you can perform Sky Command System  
II operation to remotely control the HF/ 50 MHz band  
of your TS-590SG transceiver.  
9 To quit the FM repeater operation, disconnect the  
interface cable between the transceivers, then  
access Menu Nos. 80 and 81 on the TS-590SG  
transceiver and select “oFF”.  
You will use one transceiver (TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/  
TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-D710, or  
TM-D700A) as a remote control unit, called a  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE  
“Commander”. The other VHF/ UHF transceiver (TH-  
D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-  
D710, or TM-D700A) with the TS-590SG transceiver is  
called the “Transporter”. This TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/  
TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceier will function as an interface between the  
Commander (a remote control unit) and the HF/ 50  
MHz band of the TS-590SG transceiver.  
If you have a TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-  
D710/ TM-D700(A/E), you can connect it to the TS-  
590SG transceiver to use the DX PacketCluster Tune  
function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a cross-  
wired DB-9 cable as shown on page 74.  
1 On the TS-590SG, press [MENU], then turn  
MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 67.  
This system allows you, for example, to watch for and  
hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF  
transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or  
patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to select the  
same communication baud rate configured on the  
TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-  
D700(A/E).  
Note: Operation of Sky Command System II may not been  
permitted in certain countries. Check your local laws before  
operating.  
3 Tune to the DX PacketCluster node frequency on  
the TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-  
D700(A/E).  
4 Using [TNC], enter the APRS mode on the  
TM-D710/G/ RC-D710/ TM-D700.  
•
“APRS” or “TNC APRS” appears on the  
TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-  
D700(A/E) display.  
5 Using [DX], enter the DX PacketCluster mode on  
the TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-  
D700(A/E).  
•
Every time the DX station’s information is  
reported to the DX PacketCluster node, the  
TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/  
TM-D700(A/E) stores and lists the report to the  
memory.  
SKY COMMAND SYSTEM II DIAGRAM  
VHF freq.  
Audio  
Audio  
UHF freq.  
Control command X  
Audio X  
Control command X  
W Response  
W Response  
6 Select a desired DX station data with [▲]/ [▼] on  
the TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-  
D700(A/E).  
Commander  
Transporter  
7 Press [TUNE] on the TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710  
or [MENU] on the TH-D72(A/E) or [MHz] on the  
TM-D700(A/E) to transfer the frequency data to the  
TS-590SG transceiver.  
•
If the transferred frequency data is available  
on the TS-590SG transceiver, the frequency  
data will be overwritten to the current operating  
frequency. Otherwise, the operating frequency  
of the TS-590SG transceiver remains  
unchanged.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES  
PREPARATION  
POWER ON MESSAGE  
Although you can use a TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/  
TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceiver as a “Commander” (an external remote  
control unit), the following procedure shows how to set  
up your TS-590SG and TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/  
Each time you switch the transceiver ON,  
“KENWOOD” (default) appears on the sub display  
for approximately 2 seconds. You can program your  
favorite message in place of the default message. You  
can enter a message using up to 8 characters.  
TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceivers as a “Transporter” at a base station and  
the TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-  
D710, or TM-D700A transceiver as a “Commander”.  
1 Press [MENU], then press [Q-M.IN]/ [Q-MR] or  
turn the MULTI/CH control to access Menu No 01.  
2 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] to begin editing  
the message.  
STARTING SKY COMMAND SYSTEM II  
OPERATION  
3 Move the cursor to the left or right by pressing  
[Q-M.IN] or [Q-MR].  
After you have completed setting up the following, you  
can start Sky Command System II operation. Without  
programming these parameters, you cannot use Sky  
Command System II.  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL)] or turn the MULTI/  
CH control to select your desired character.  
TS-590SG + TH-D7A/ TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D700A/  
TM-D710/G(A/E)/ TM-V71A + RC-D710 (Transporter)  
Setup:  
•
You can delete the selected character by  
pressing [CL].  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining  
1 Configure the TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/  
G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A as a  
“Transporter” and connect all the necessary cables  
to the TS-590SG transceiver.  
characters.  
6 Press [MENU] to set the entry and exit character  
entry mode.  
2 Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the  
•
Press [CLR] at any time to cancel character  
entry mode and exit the Menu mode.  
TS-590SG transceiver.  
3 On the TS-590SG, press [MENU], then turn  
Available alphanumeric characters:  
MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 67.  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q(q) R S T U V W X  
Y Z (space) + – / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
4 Press [M.IN]/ [SCAN (SG.SEL] to select the  
desired communication speed.  
5 Select the same communication parameters  
to match the TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/  
G(A/E), TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A  
transceiver.  
6 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.  
7 Configure and start the Transporter mode on the  
TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E), TM-V71A  
+ RC-D710, or TM-D700A transceiver.  
•
Refer to the respective instruction manuals of  
the TH-D7A, TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E),  
TM-V71A + RC-D710, or TM-D700A for  
information on how to connect, configure, and  
operate the transceivers for Sky Command  
System II.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS  
COM CONNECTOR  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
NC  
Function  
I/O  
—
O
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No connection  
Transmit data  
RXD  
TXD  
NC  
Receive data  
—
—
—
I
No connection  
Ground  
GND  
NC  
No connection  
Receive enable  
Transmit enable  
No connection  
RTS  
CTS  
NC  
O
—
ACC2 CONNECTOR  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
NC  
Function  
I/O  
—
I
1
2
No connection  
RTTY key input  
RTTY  
Audio output from the transceiver  
•
Connect to the audio input of the TNC, MCP, or PC (or PC  
interface connection).  
•
•
Audio output level is independent from the AF control setting.  
Audio output level can be changed by adjusting the value in  
Menu No. 74. Set the value to a moderate audio output level.  
The default value of 4 is approximately 0.5 Vp-p, which is a  
standard modulating signal. The settings of 0 ~ 9 vary from  
3
ANO  
O
approximately 0 Vp-p to 1.2 Vp-p  
.
•
Impedance: Approx. 10 k.  
—
O
4
5
GND  
PSQ  
Ground  
Transceiver squelch control  
•
Connect to the squelch input of the TNC, MCP, or PC  
connection interface.  
•
•
Squelch open: Low impedance  
Squelch closed: High impedance  
—
—
—
6
7
8
NC  
NC  
No connection  
No connection  
GND  
Ground  
PTT input for data communication  
•
Connect to the PTT output of the TNC, MCP, or PC connection  
interface.  
Microphone audio input mutes when transmitting.  
I
9
PKS  
NC  
•
—
10  
No connection  
Audio input for data communication  
•
•
•
Connect to the audio output of the TNC, MCP, or PC (or PC  
interface connection).  
Audio input level is independent from the microphone gain (set  
with the [MIC] key).  
Audio input level can be changed by adjusting the value in Menu  
No. 73.The default value of 4 is approximately 10 mVrms, which  
is a standard modulating signal.The settings of 0 ~ 9 vary from  
approximately no modulation to approximately 1 mVrms.  
I
11  
ANI  
•
Impedance: Approx. 10 k.  
—
I
12  
13  
GND  
SS  
Ground  
PTT input (same as the front panel MIC connector)  
•
During transmission, the audio input of ACC2 connector  
terminal 11 (ANI) and the USB terminal are muted.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
REMOTE CONNECTOR  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
SPO  
Function  
I/O  
O
1
2
Speaker output  
COM  
Common terminal  
I/O  
Standby; when grounded, the transceiver enters TX mode.  
3
4
SS  
I
•
During transmission, the audio input of ACC2 connector  
terminal 11 (ANI) and the USB terminal are muted.  
When connected with the common terminal, the amplifier  
enters TX mode.  
MKE  
I/O  
When connected with the common terminal, the amplifier  
enters RX mode.  
5
6
BRK  
ALC  
I/O  
I
ALC input from the amplifier (approx. -7 V).  
Approx. +12 V DC is output when in TX mode (10 mA  
max.).  
7
RL  
O
EXT.AT CONNECTOR (for AT-300)  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Function  
Ground  
I/O  
—
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
TT  
AT-300 control input/ output  
Ground  
I/O  
—
GND  
NC  
—
No connection  
TS  
AT-300 control input/ output  
Power supply for EXT.AT Switched 13.8 V (4 A max.).  
I/O  
O
14S  
MIC CONNECTOR  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
MIC  
SS  
Function  
MIC signal input  
I/O  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MIC standby (PTT) control  
MIC Down control  
MIC UP control  
I
MD  
I
MU  
I
8A  
Switched 8 V (10 mA max.)  
No connection  
O
—
—
—
NC  
MSG  
MCG  
MIC GND  
GND  
Note:  
◆
The terminal pin numbers are arranged as seen on the front and rear panel.  
◆
Do not use a cable exceeding 3 m (9.8 feet) with the following connectors:  
PHONES jack MIC connector  
KEY jack PADDLE jack  
COM connector  
DRV connector  
EXT. SP jack  
ACC 2 connector REMOTE connector  
USB connector  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 13  
CONNECTING TO DATA COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT  
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER  
When performing data communications using RTTY (AFSK), PSK31, SSTV, JT65, etc., with your transceiver set  
to DATA mode (SSB-DATA, FM-DATA, AM-DATA), and the sound function of your computer being used for data  
communication software, perform the connections as below.  
When using the USB audio function: connect to the computer USB port. When using DATA VOX or PC control  
commands to switch between transmission and reception (“TX1;” to start transmission and “RX” to end  
transmission), it is possible to operate data communications by using only a USB cable connection. When  
connecting to a computer using a USB cable, download the virtual COM port driver.  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.html  
When using an ACC2 connector: connect the computer audio output line to pin 11 (ANI) of the ACC2 connector,  
and connect the computer audio input line to pin 3 (ANO) of the ACC2 connector. To switch between transmission  
and reception, use pin 9 (PKS) of the ACC2 connector, DATA VOX, or the PC control command (“TX1;” to start  
transmission and “RX” to end transmission). <Refer to page 31 for the DATA VOX function.>  
When using the PC Control Command, connect the transceiver to the computer using an RS-232C straight cable or  
a USB cable (A-B).  
Through Menu No. 70, you can select to use the microphone or the data communication input signal from the ACC2  
connector or USB connector as the input signal that will be transmitted by operating the front panel SEND key,  
microphone PTT (SS), pin 13 (SS) of the ACC2 connector, or pin 3 (SS) of the REMOTE connector.  
Note:  
◆
USB cables are not provided as accessories. Purchase commercially available cables.  
◆
Delays may occur when using USB audio and, depending on the load and performance of the computer, breaks may occur in the audio.  
We recommend using USB audio in situations where time lag is not an issue, such as data communications or when recording audio  
onto a computer.  
◆
◆
For information about setting up the data communication software, refer to the software’s help files and documentation.  
When connecting this device to a computer, be sure to first switch off the power to this device before connecting it to the computer.  
TS-590SG  
To USB port  
Supplied 13-pin DIN Plug (Use a  
self-made connection cable using  
Personal computer  
the 13-pin DIN plug supplied with the  
USB cable  
transceiver.)  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
CONNECTING TO A TNC  
When the transceiver is set to DATA mode and you are operating packet communications using an external TNC  
(Terminal Node Controller), perform the connections as below.  
Use the ACC2 connector to connect with an external TNC. Connect the external TNC modulation output line to  
pin 11 (ANI) of the ACC2 connector, demodulation input line to pin 3 (ANO) of the ACC2 connector, and transmit  
control (PTT) line to pin 13 (PKS) of the ACC2 connector.  
Note:  
◆
Do not share a single power source between the TNC and the transceiver.  
◆
Keep as much space as possible between the transceiver and computer, and between the TNC, to prevent the transceiver from picking  
up noise.  
TS-590SG  
Power supply for TNC  
Supplied 13-pin DIN Plug (Use a  
self-made connection cable using  
the 13-pin DIN plug supplied with the  
transceiver.)  
TNC  
Personal computer  
CONNECTING TO RTTY EQUIPMENT (FSK)  
When the transceiver is set to FSK mode and you are operating RTTY (FSK) using an MCP (Multi Communication  
Processor) or RTTY equipment, perform the connections as below.  
Use the ACC2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment. Connect the RTTY equipment keying output line to pin  
2 (RTTY) of the ACC2 connector and demodulation input line to pin 3 (ANO) of the ACC2 connector. Additionally,  
connect the transmit control (PTT) line to pin 13 (SS) of the ACC2 connector.  
Note:  
◆
◆
Do not share a single power source between the MCP/RTTY unit equipment and the transceiver.  
Keep as much space as possible between the transceiver and computer, and between the RTTY equipment, to prevent the transceiver  
from picking up noise.  
TS-590SG  
Power supply for RTTY unit  
Supplied 13-pin DIN Plug (Use a  
self-made connection cable using  
the 13-pin DIN plug supplied with the  
transceiver.)  
RTTY unit  
Personal computer  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 13  
CONNECTION TO THE LINEAR AMPLIFIER  
You can connect a linear amplifier to the REMOTE connector.  
Prior to activating the linear amplifier, ensure that you have configured the linear amplifier controls {page 55}. The  
response time from when the transceiver changes from receive to transmit and when transmission begins, is 10 ms.  
In operation other than CW Full Break-in, changing the menu configuration extends the response time to 25 ms (45  
ms for SSB, FM and AM modes).  
Note: TL-922 has been discontinued and is no longer available.  
CONNECTION TO THE TL-922  
TL-922 (HF linear amplifier)  
TS-590SG  
Supplied 7-pin DIN Plug (Use a self-  
made connection cable using the 7-pin  
DIN plug supplied with the transceiver.)  
CONTROL RELAY  
REMOTE  
connector  
(front view)  
GND  
RL CONT  
COM  
Allocate pin number 2 (COM) in the REMOTE connector to connect to the GND of the  
TL-922, and pin number 4 (MKE) to the RL CONT of the TL-922. Additionally, connect pin  
number 6 (ALC) to the ALC OUT of the TL-922. Configure Menu No. 59 (HF) to “3”.  
MKE  
ALC  
GND  
CONNECTING A TYPICAL LINEAR AMPLIFIER  
To connect a commercially available linear amplifier to the transceiver, follow the instructions given in the illustration  
below.  
Note:  
◆
Use a linear amplifier that has an ALC output level in the range of -7 V to -10 V.  
◆
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the linear amplifier for connection to the linear amplifier.  
3rd-party  
Linear  
Amplifier  
TS-590SG  
Supplied 7-pin DIN Plug (Use a self-made  
connection cable using the 7-pin DIN plug  
supplied with the transceiver.)  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
TX/RX CONTROL  
REMOTE  
connector  
(front view)  
GND  
RL CONT  
COM  
To connect a linear amplifier, configure to enable the control signal state in Menu No. 59  
(HF) and Menu No. 60 (50 MHz), and make the appropriate connections between the  
TX/RL control terminals of the TS-590SG and the linear amplifier.  
MKE  
ALC  
GND  
ANTENNA TUNER  
Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an AT-300 external antenna tuner. If you connect the external  
antenna tuner to the ANT 2 connector, it will not function.  
Note:  
◆
◆
The AT-300 cannot be used for 50 MHz operation.  
The AT-300 has been discontinued and is no longer available.  
ANT 1  
connector  
TS-590SG  
AT-300  
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER  
When transferring data to or from another TS-990S, TS-590SG, TS-590S, TS-480HX/SAT, TS-2000/X, TS-570S/D,  
or TS-870S, directly connect the 2 transceivers using the COM connectors.  
Compatible transceiver  
TS-590SG  
DB-9 connector wiring (Cross-wired)  
(f)  
(f)  
RS-232C cross cable  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 13  
DX PACKETCLUSTER TUNE  
If you have a TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ TM-D700(A/E), you can connect the TH-D72(A/E)/ TM-  
D710/G(A/E)/ RC-D710/ RC-D710/ TM-D700(A/E) to the TS-590SG transceiver to use the DX PacketCluster Tune  
function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a cross-wired RS-232C cable as shown below. (For connecting to the  
TH-D72(A/E), refer to the TH-D72(A/E) instruction manual.)  
RS-232C cross cable  
TS-590SG  
TM-D710/G(A/E)/  
RC-D710 + TM-V71(A/E)  
(m)  
(f)  
TM-D700(A/E)  
(f)  
RC-D710 + PG-5J  
(f)  
PG-5G  
CROSSBAND REPEATER  
If you have a KENWOOD FM transceiver (K type) with a 6 pin mini DIN connector, you can connect the FM  
transceiver to the TS-590SG transceiver to use the Crossband repeater function. Connect the 2 transceivers with a  
DIN (13-pin)/ mini DIN cable (6-pin) as shown below.  
DIN (13-pin)/ Mini DIN (6-pin)  
TS-590SG  
TM-D710GA/  
TM-D710A/  
TM-V71A  
TM-D700A  
DIN (13-pin) plug  
Mini DIN (6-pin) plug  
PKS  
ANI  
PR1  
SQC  
ANO  
PKD  
PSQ  
PKS  
After connecting the 2 transceivers with the cable, access Menu Nos. 80 (PKS polarity) and 81 (Busy lockout) on  
the TS-590SG transceiver and select “on”. You will further need to adjust the audio input/ output level of the TS-  
590SG transceiver using Menu Nos. 73 and 74.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 INSTALLING OPTIONS  
You will require a #1 Philips screwdriver to install the  
VGS-1 or SO-3 TCXO. You will also need a soldering  
iron (approx. 30 watts) to install the SO-3 TCXO.  
VGS-1 VOICE GUIDE & STORAGE UNIT  
1 Remove the shield cover (4 screws).  
Switch OFF the transceiver power and unplug the DC power  
cable before performing any installations.  
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE  
When installing the optional VGS-1 or SO-3 TCXO,  
remove the bottom case of the transceiver:  
1 Remove the 10 screws.  
2 Lift off the bottom case.  
2 There are 5 rubber cushions in the VGS-1 package.  
Use the 2 rubber cushions shown below (20 x 30  
x 2 mm and 21 x 21 x 2.5 mm) and attach them to  
the VGS-1.  
•
The remaining cushions are not used.  
3 Plug the VGS-1 into the VGS-1 connector of the  
PC board, pressing down on the top of the VGS-1  
until secure.  
4 Replace the shield cover and tighten the 4 screws.  
5 Replace the bottom case (10 screws).  
Note: After installation, you can adjust the VGS-1 playback and  
voice guide volume by selecting Menu Nos. 05 and 06.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLING OPTIONS 14  
SO-3 TCXO  
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION  
The SO-3 option improves the transceiver frequency  
stability to 0.5 ppm.  
Note: The transceiver is adjusted at the factory prior to shipping.  
Do not perform this adjustment unless it is necessary.  
1 Remove the CN503 connector and TCXO PCB  
1 Set the following on the transceiver:  
screw, as shown below.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mode: CW  
AF control: Center  
CN503  
Menu No. 40 (CW RX pitch): 800 Hz  
SHIFT control: 800 Hz  
RIT function: OFF  
TCXO PCB  
Break-in function (VOX): OFF  
2 Remove the bottom case (10 screws) from the  
transceiver.  
3 Tune in a standard frequency station such as WWV  
or WWVH at, for example, 10.000.00 MHz or  
15.000.00 MHz.  
•
•
•
Adjust the Tuning control so that the display  
reads the exact frequency of the station.  
You should hear a beat tone of approximately  
800 Hz.  
2 Remove the TCXO PCB.  
3 Insert the SO-3 TCXO.  
For 800 Hz:  
•
Align the SO-3 TCXO adjustment hole with the  
“O” on the TCXO PCB.  
af  
display  
reference  
f = (f  
where f  
reference frequency.  
/15.600 x f  
) + 800 Hz  
reference  
is the shift from the 15.6 MHz  
4 Close your CW key. You will hear a transmit  
sidetone of approximately 800 Hz.  
•
•
•
This sidetone produces a double beat tone  
when it combines with the received signal.  
Adjust the AF control to hear the double beat  
clearly.  
4 Solder all pins on the reverse side of the PCB.  
5 Re-insert the TCXO PCB in the transceiver.  
6 Connect the CN503 and tighten the screw.  
7 Move the C903 and C904 jumper as shown below.  
For 800 Hz:  
sidetone  
f
= 800 Hz 50 ppm (= 800 0.04 Hz)  
reference  
where f  
is the shift from the 15.6 MHz  
reference frequency.  
5 TS-590SG transceiver without SO-3:  
Adjust the trimmer (TC501) to minimize the  
frequency difference between the received 800 Hz  
tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.  
TS-590SG transceiver with SO-3:  
TC501  
CN904  
CN903  
Adjust the trimmer inside the SO-3 using the  
supplied plastic adjustment tool. Minimize the  
frequency difference between the received 800 Hz  
tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.  
Note:  
◆
To avoid misplacing the jumper, keep it attached to 1 pin of  
C903 or C904.  
◆
When removing the SO-3 TCXO, replace the jumper to its  
original position.  
8 Replace the bottom case (10 screws).  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 INSTALLING OPTIONS  
PRECAUTIONS  
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET  
•
When operating mobile, do not attempt to configure  
the transceiver while driving; it is too dangerous.  
ATTENTION: When installing the MB-430, use the SEMS  
Screws provided with the TS-590SG.  
•
Use of the transceiver while you are driving may be  
against traffic laws. Please check and observe the  
vehicle regulations in your area.  
When installing the MB-430, attach the supplied  
plastic spacers to the transceiver in advance. This is  
necessary to protect the TS-590SG transceiver from  
scratches.  
Plastic spacers  
Make sure the tab faces out  
Once the bracket is installed onto the vehicle, prepare  
the transceiver by loosely screwing in the rear screws.  
Hook those screws onto the rear guide rail of the  
mounting bracket then adjust the transceiver to your  
desired angle before tightening the screws. Insert and  
tighten the front screws to secure the transceiver in  
place.  
Front screw  
Rear screw  
To remove the transceiver from the bracket, first  
remove the front screws, then loosen the rear screws  
slightly and pull the transceiver forward to unlatch it  
from the bracket.  
Do not install the transceiver so that it is vertically on its side.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 TROUBLESHOOTING  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Note:  
◆
◆
◆
Record the date of purchase, serial number, and dealer from  
Your transceiver has been factory aligned and  
tested to specification before shipment. Under  
normal circumstances, the transceiver will operate  
in accordance with these operating instructions.  
All adjustable trimmers, coils, and resistors in the  
transceiver are preset at the factory. They should  
only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is  
familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary  
test equipment. Attempting service or alignment  
without factory authorization may void the transceiver  
warranty.  
whom the transceiver was purchased.  
For your own information, retain a written record of any  
maintenance performed on the transceiver.  
When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy  
of the bill of sale or other proof-of-purchase showing the date  
of sale.  
CLEANING  
The keys, controls, and case of the transceiver are  
likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove  
the controls from the transceiver and clean them with  
a neutral detergent and warm water. To clean the  
case, use a neutral detergent (no strong chemicals)  
and a damp cloth.  
When operated properly, the transceiver will provide  
years of service and enjoyment without requiring  
further realignment. The information in this section  
gives some general service procedures requiring little  
or no test equipment.  
FIRMWARE UPDATING  
SERVICE  
ABOUT FIRMWARE UPDATING  
If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to  
your dealer or service center for repairs, pack the  
transceiver in its original box and packing material.  
Include a full description of the problems experienced.  
Include both your telephone number and fax number  
(if available) along with your name and address in  
case the service technician needs to call for further  
information while investigating your problem. Don’t  
return accessory items unless you feel they are  
directly related to the service problem. Please do not  
send subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send  
the complete transceiver.  
You can update the transceiver firmware anytime an  
update becomes available. Updating the firmware  
may improve the functionality or add new functions.  
The latest firmware can be downloaded from the  
KENWOOD website. For the Firmware updating  
procedure, refer to “Firmware update information” on  
the website.  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.html  
VERIFYING THE FIRMWARE VERSION  
Before you begin updating the firmware, verify your  
current transceiver firmware version by accessing  
Menu No. 00.  
You may return your transceiver for service to the  
authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you  
purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service  
center. A copy of the service report will be returned  
with the transceiver.  
Tag all returned items with your name and call sign for  
identification. Please mention the model and serial  
number of the transceiver in any communication  
regarding the problem.  
SERVICE NOTE  
If you desire to correspond on a technical or  
operational problem, please make your note short,  
complete, and to the point. Help us help you by  
providing the following:  
•
Model and serial number of equipment  
Question or problem you are having  
•
•
Other equipment in your station pertaining to the  
problem  
•
•
Meter readings  
Other related information (Menu setup, mode,  
frequency, key sequence to induce malfunction,  
etc.)  
Do not pack the equipment in crushed newspapers for shipment.  
Extensive damage may result during rough handling or shipping.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 TROUBLESHOOTING  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of  
difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to  
incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table and  
the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual before assuming your transceiver is defective.  
Note: Placing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in the transceiver.  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Page  
The transceiver will  
not power up after  
connecting a 13.8 V  
DC power supply and  
pressing [ ].  
Nothing appears  
on the display and  
no receiver noise is  
heard.  
1 DC power supply is OFF.  
2 Faulty power cable.  
1 Switch the DC power supply ON.  
2 Inspect the power cable. Confirm that the  
polarities are correct (Red: positive (+); Black;  
negative (–)).  
3 Confirm the connections to the DC power  
supply are secure.  
4 Look for the cause of the blown fuse. After  
inspecting and correcting any problems,  
install a new fuse of the specified rating.  
10  
1
3 The power cable is not  
connected securely.  
4 The power cable fuse is  
open.  
1
2
After switching  
the power ON, the  
transceiver does not  
1 The input voltage is outside 1 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 ~ 16 V  
1
13.8 V DC 15% (11.7 ~  
15.8 V DC)  
battery.  
function normally. For 2 The microprocessor has  
2 Review “MICROPROCESSOR RESET”.  
After understanding what data will be lost, do  
a VFO Reset. If the problem remains, do a  
Full Reset.  
83  
example, no digits or  
incorrect digits appear  
on the display.  
malfunctioned.  
After switching the  
transceiver ON, the  
transceiver refuses to  
transmit.  
The current rating of the DC  
power supply is too low.  
Use a DC power supply that has a 20.5 A or  
higher current rating  
1
ii  
The transceiver does 1 Procedures are not being  
1 Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS  
FOLLOWED”.  
2 Press and hold [FINE (F.LOCK)] to switch the 56  
function OFF. The “ ” icon disappears.  
not respond correctly  
after pressing key  
combinations or  
turning controls per  
instructions in this  
manual.  
followed precisely.  
2 The Frequency Lock  
function is ON.  
3 The microprocessor and its 3 Review “MICROPROCESSOR RESET”.  
83  
memory need to be reset.  
After understanding what data will be lost, do  
a Partial Reset. If the problem remains, do a  
Full Reset.  
The frequency cannot The Frequency Lock function  
Press and hold [FINE (F.LOCK)] to switch the  
56  
be changed.  
is ON.  
function OFF. The “  
” icon disappears.  
SSB audio quality is  
very poor; the high or  
low audio frequencies 2 The IF filter is incorrectly  
1 The wrong operation mode 1 Select USB or LSB for the mode.  
is selected for the receiver.  
11  
40  
41  
41  
2 Turn the HI/SHIFT or LO/WIDTH control to  
adjust the DSP filter width.  
3 Press [NR (LEV)] until the NR function turns  
OFF.  
are absent.  
set.  
3 Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is  
ON.  
4 Beat Cancel 1 or 2 is ON.  
4 Press [BC (A.NOTCH)] until the BC function  
turns OFF.  
No signals are  
received or receive  
sensitivity seems  
poor.  
1 The SQL control is fully  
clockwise.  
2 The Attenuator is ON.  
3 MIC [PTT] is pressed.  
1 Turn the SQL control counterclockwise.  
12  
42  
2 Press [ATT (RX ANT)] to switch the  
Attenuator is OFF.  
3 Release MIC [PTT].  
13  
40  
4 The IF filter bandwidth was 4 Review “DSP FILTERS”, and set the  
incorrectly set.  
controls accordingly.  
5 Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select the  
other antenna connector.  
5 The wrong antenna  
connector (ANT 1 or ANT  
2) was selected.  
52  
6 The pre-amplifier is OFF.  
6 Press [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to switch the function  
ON.  
7 Restart the transceiver by turning the power  
OFF and then back ON. If the problem  
persists, consult KENWOOD authorized  
Service Center.  
42  
—
7 An internal DSP error  
occurs.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 15  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Page  
No signals are  
The RF gain was set too low.  
Turn the RF control clockwise to increase the RF  
gain.  
10  
received or receive  
sensitivity seems  
poor; S-meter is  
reading full scale.  
Received signals  
are completely  
unintelligible  
The wrong modulation was  
selected.  
Select the correct modulation mode.  
11  
Memory Scan will not 1 The SQL control was not  
1 Adjust the SQL control to just eliminate  
background noise.  
2 Unlock at least 2 memory channels.  
12  
46  
43  
start scanning.  
set correctly.  
2 Less than 2 memory  
channels were unlocked.  
3 Less than 2 memory  
channels were  
3 Store data in at least 2 memory channels.  
programmed.  
Memory Scan will  
not scan one of the  
stored channels; the  
desired channel is not  
locked out.  
With Group Scan selected, the Select the Memory Group that contains the  
channel you want to scan is in memory channel you want to scan.  
a different group.  
51  
Program Scan will not The start and end frequencies Store different start and end frequencies.  
48  
52  
start scanning.  
are identical  
AT does not finish  
successfully.  
The impedance of the coaxial  
cable and antenna was not  
matched. Tuning does not  
successfully finish depending  
on conditions, although the  
SWR meter indicates smaller  
than 3:1.  
Adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.  
The internal tuner is  
bypassed immediately system is too high.  
after tuning is started.  
The SWR of the antenna  
Adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR  
52  
2
You cannot transmit  
even though you  
press MIC [PTT], or  
transmissions result  
in no contacts.  
1 The microphone plug was  
1 Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC  
connector has no foreign objects in it, then  
plug in the connector firmly.  
not inserted completely into  
the MIC connector.  
2 The Transmit Inhibit function 2 Change Menu No. 66 to OFF.  
is ON.  
3 CW or FSK was selected  
instead of a voice mode.  
4 The DSP TX filter  
bandwidth was improperly  
selected.  
33  
11  
33  
3 Select the correct voice mode.  
4 Adjust the settings in Menu Nos. 31, 32.  
5 The wrong antenna  
connector (ANT 1 or ANT  
2) was selected.  
5 Press and hold [PRE (ANT 1/2)] to select the  
52  
other antenna connector.  
Attempting to transmit 1 The antenna is not  
1 Check the antenna connection. Correct as  
necessary.  
2 Reduce the SWR of the antenna system.  
1
results in the “HELLO”  
message appearing  
and the reception  
connected correctly.  
2 The impedances of the  
antenna and transceiver  
are not properly matched.  
52  
mode being restored.  
3 The input voltage is outside 3 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 ~ 16 V  
1
13.8 V DC 15% (11.7 ~  
15.8 V DC).  
4 The current rating of the DC 4 Use a DC power supply that has a current  
power supply is not enough. rating of more than 20.5 A at 13.8 V DC.  
battery.  
1
The transceiver has  
low transmission  
power.  
1 The microphone gain is set 1 When in SSB or AM mode, increase the  
13  
too low.  
microphone gain.  
2 Check the antenna connections. Confirm that 52  
the antenna tuner is reporting a low SWR.  
2 Poor antenna system  
connections are causing  
high SWR.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
The VOX gain is set too low.  
Corrective Action  
Increase the VOX gain.  
Page  
VOX does not  
operate.  
32  
HF/ 50 MHz Linear  
amplifier does not  
operate.  
1 The linear amplifier control 1 Set Menu No. 59 (HF) or 60 (50 MHz) to 1, 2,  
55  
70  
is OFF.  
, 3, 4, or 5.  
2 The REMOTE connector  
wiring is wrong or faulty.  
2 Inspect the REMOTE connector wiring and  
correct it as necessary.  
The transceiver’s  
output power  
decreases after a  
short operating time.  
1 The air filters for the cooling 1 Contact a KENWOOD authorized service  
—
—
fans have been congested  
with dust.  
center to clean the filters.  
2 The cooling fans cannot  
provide enough air flow to  
cool the transceiver down.  
2 Relocate the transceiver so that air can easily  
flow through the TS-590SG to keep the unit  
cooled.  
You cannot access  
and use repeaters.  
1 Many repeaters require a  
subtone or 1750 Hz tone to  
access.  
2 Transmission and/or  
reception frequency is  
wrong.  
1 Review “FM REPEATER OPERATION” and  
select the correct frequency and type of  
subtone.  
2 You must transmit on the repeater’s input  
frequency and receive on the repeater’s  
output frequency. Refer to “FM REPEATER  
OPERATION”.  
25  
25  
Digital operation  
1 Physical connections  
between the transceiver,  
computer, and TNC/ MCP  
are incorrect, or software  
settings in the TNC/ MCP  
are wrong.  
1 Re-check all connections using this manual,  
your TNC/ MCP manual, and your computer  
hardware manual as references.  
72  
results in few or no  
connects or contacts  
with other stations.  
2 Different transmission and  
reception frequencies are  
being used.  
3 The levels between the  
transceiver and the TNC/  
MCP are incorrect.  
4 Your transmitted signal or  
the incoming receive signal  
is too weak.  
2 Confirm that the RIT and XIT functions are  
switched OFF. Confirm that you are not  
operating split frequency.  
3 Adjust TX and RX levels using Menu Nos. 73  
and 74, and level controls on your TNC/ MCP.  
30,32  
61,72  
1
4 Reorient/ relocate your antenna or increase  
your antenna gain.  
5 The TX delay time  
parameter in your TNC/  
MCP was incorrectly set.  
5 Set the TNC/ MCP TX delay time to more  
than 300 ms.  
—
Attempts at controlling 1 Problem with cable that  
1 Check the cable and cable connections.  
71  
60  
the transceiver with  
the computer have  
failed.  
connects the PC to the  
TS-590SG.  
2 Communication parameters 2 Use the same parameters in the terminal and  
set in your terminal  
the transceiver. Check Menu Nos. 67 and 68.  
program do not match the  
transceiver parameters.  
“TEMP-HI” appears  
and “CHECK” in  
Morse code sounds.  
A sensor in the transceiver  
detected high temperature.  
Stop transmitting and let the transceiver cool  
down for a while. Contact a KENWOOD  
authorized service center to clean the internal air  
filters.  
—
Transmission  
suddenly stops.  
The voltage of the DC power  
supply is too high.  
Adjust the DC power supply voltage to  
13.8 V DC.  
1
“DSP ERR x” appears An internal DSP error occurs.  
(where x is a number  
from 0 ~ 3).  
Restart the transceiver by turning the power  
OFF and then back ON. If the problem persists,  
consult KENWOOD authorized Service Center.  
—
“VGS ERR” appears. An internal error occurred in  
the VGS-1.  
Confirm that the connector of the VGS-1 is  
securely connected to the transceiver, then  
turn the transceiver power OFF and ON. If  
the problem persists, contact a KENWOOD  
authorized service center for repairs.  
76  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING 15  
Problem  
Probable Cause  
Corrective Action  
Page  
A message cannot be There is a communication error Confirm that the connector of the VGS-1 is  
76,83  
recorded/ played back between the transceiver and  
or no announcement the VGS-1.  
can be heard.  
securely connected to the transceiver. Perform  
the Full reset. If the problem persists, contact a  
KENWOOD authorized service center for repairs  
(with the VGS-1 attached).  
The transceiver  
output power seems  
to be low in SSB  
mode.  
Most of the external RF  
Apply a continuous single tone (1 kHz) to the  
microphone audio input to measure the RF  
output power. The PEP will be the same as this  
RF output level.  
—
power meters measure the  
average RF power. So, the  
meter reading is low when  
you operate and talk in SSB  
mode. The LCD meter used  
in the TS-590SG has relatively  
fast response time but it is not  
fast enough to measure the  
accurate PEP (Peak Envelope  
Power).  
The PC and external The input terminal is different  
Confirm that the setting of Menu No. 69 matches  
the input terminal for the external equipment.  
61  
equipment is not  
modulating.  
from the one specified (Menu  
No. 69) for the external  
equipment.  
•
A confirmation message appears when  
MICROPROCESSOR RESET  
performing the VFO Reset. Press [A/B (A=B)]  
again to proceed. Otherwise, press any other  
key to cancel the VFO Reset and return to  
normal operation.  
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,  
resetting the microprocessor to its default settings may  
resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting  
the microprocessor of the TS-590SG transceiver:  
Partial Reset and Full Reset.  
•
The VFOs reset to the factory default values.  
FULL RESET  
INITIAL SETTINGS  
Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data  
in all the memory channels. In addition, this function  
resets all the settings that you customized, to the  
factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner  
preset data, etc.).  
For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating  
frequency and mode are as follows:  
•
•
VFO A: 14.000.00 MHz/ USB  
VFO B: 14.000.00 MHz/ USB  
1 Turn the transceiver power OFF.  
The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels  
have no data stored.  
2 Press [A/B (A=B)] + [ ] to switch the transceiver  
ON.  
VFO RESET  
•
A confirmation message appears on the display.  
Perform a VFO Reset if a key or control does not  
function according to the instructions in this manual.  
The following data is NOT erased by performing a  
VFO Reset.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control and select “FULL  
RESET”.  
4 Press [A/B (A=B)] to perform the Full reset.  
•
•
•
•
•
Memory channel data  
Menu settings  
•
A confirmation message appears when  
performing the Full Reset. Press [A/B (A=B)]  
again to proceed. Otherwise, press any other  
key to cancel the Partial Reset and return to  
normal operation.  
Antenna tuner preset data  
ANT 1/ ANT 2 selection data  
•
All frequencies, modes, memory data,  
adjustment values, and AT preset data are set  
to the factory default values.  
Frequency and mode data for the Auto Mode  
function  
•
Various adjustment setting values  
1 Turn the transceiver power OFF.  
2 Press [A/B (A=B)] + [ ] to switch the transceiver  
ON.  
•
A confirmation message appears on the display.  
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control and select “VFO  
RESET”.  
4 Press [A/B (A=B)] to perform the VFO reset.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 TROUBLESHOOTING  
60 m BAND OPERATION  
OPERATION NOTICES  
Effective from July 3, 2003, FCC Report and Order  
(R&O) in ET Docket 02-98 granted US amateurs  
secondary access to five discrete channels in the  
vicinity of 5 MHz. General, Advanced, and Amateur  
Extra licensees may use the following five channels  
on a secondary basis with a maximum effective  
radiated power of 50 W PEP relative to a half wave  
dipole. Only upper sideband suppressed carrier voice  
transmissions may be used. The frequencies are  
5330.5, 5346.5, 5366.5, 5371.5 and 5403.5 kHz. The  
occupied bandwidth is limited to 2.8 kHz centered on  
5332, 5348, 5368, 5373, and 5405 kHz respectively.  
The TS-590SG transceiver stops at the 60 m band  
as you scroll up or down the amateur radio frequency  
bands. For more information, contact ARRL or search  
their Web site using the key word “60 meter”:  
The transceiver has been designed and engineered to  
avoid possible hardware glitches. However, you may  
notice the following symptoms when you operate the  
transceiver. These symptoms are not malfunctions.  
DC POWER SUPPLY  
As stated in the SPECIFICATIONS {page 80}, this  
transceiver requires a supplied DC voltage source of  
13.8 V 15%. If you find that the transceiver cannot  
be switched ON, or that it shuts OFF automatically, the  
DC voltage may be outside the specified range.  
In such a case, remove the DC cable from the  
transceiver immediately and confirm that the supplied  
voltage is within the specified range.  
http://www.arrl.org  
INTERNAL COOLING FAN  
The transceiver detects the temperature of the  
final department regardless of the transmission  
and reception state of the main body, in order to  
protect the internal circuits from high temperatures.  
The cooling fan speed and transmission output is  
controlled through the following.  
•
When the thermistor detects a rise in temperature  
in the final department, the cooling fan turns on at  
low speed. As the temperature rises, the speed of  
the cooling fan increases.  
•
When an abnormally high temperature is detected,  
the temperature protection circuit activates,  
reducing the transmission output to the lowest  
possible power.  
When the temperature protection circuit activates,  
return the transceiver to receive mode and leave the  
transceiver power ON. Allow time for the cooling fan  
to return the internal temperature to normal.  
•
If you turn the transceiver power OFF, the cooling  
fan will not run and it will take much longer for the  
internal temperature to decrease.  
INTERNAL BEATS  
On some spots of the receiver frequencies, the  
S-meter moves or you cannot receive any signals.  
This is inevitable when you use superheterodyne  
receivers. You may notice the signals on the following  
spots of the frequency:  
•
•
•
15.600.00 MHz  
31.200.00 MHz  
46.800.00 MHz  
AGC  
When you turn the AGC function OFF {page 30}, the  
receiving audio signals can be distorted. In this case,  
decrease the RF gain, turn the pre-amplifier OFF, or  
turn the attenuator ON. In general, the RF gain must  
be greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFF.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
HS-5  
HS-6  
MC-43S  
MC-47  
Delux Headphones  
Small Headphones  
Microphone  
Multi-function Microphone  
MC-60A  
MC-90  
PG-20  
PS-60  
Desk-top Microphone  
DSP-compatible Desk-top  
Microphone  
DC cable (7 m/ 23 ft)  
Regulated DC Power  
Supply (22.5 A)  
Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode.  
SO-3  
VGS-1  
SP-23  
KES-3S  
External Speaker  
TCXO unit  
Voice Guide and  
Storage unit  
External Speaker  
MB-430  
ARCP-590G/ ARHP-590G  
Remote control software  
Mobile Bracket  
Download the free ARCP-590G/ARHP-590G software from the following URL:  
http://www.kenwood.com/i/products/info/amateur/software_download.htm  
l
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 SPECIFICATIONS  
General  
J3E (LSB, USB)/ A1A (CW)/ A3E (AM)/ F3E (FM)/ F1B  
(FSK)  
Mode  
Antenna impedance  
Supply Voltage  
50 (with built-in antenna tuner 16.7 ~ 150 )  
DC 13.8 V 15%  
Grounding method  
Negative ground  
Transmit (max.)  
Current  
20.5 A or less  
Receive (no signal)  
1.5 A or less  
Usable temperature range  
–10 °C ~ +50 °C (+14 °F ~ +122 °F)  
Frequency stability without  
–10 °C ~ 50 °C  
SO-3  
5 ppm  
Frequency stability  
–10 °C ~ 50 °C  
with SO-3  
0.5 ppm  
Dimensions (Projections not included)  
Dimensions (Projections included)  
Weight  
W270 × H96 × D291 mm (W10.63 x H3.78 x D11.46 in)  
W280 × H107 × D335 mm (W11.02 x H4.21 x D13.19 in)  
Approx. 7.4 kg (16.31 lbs)  
Transmitter  
160 m band  
80 m band  
1.8 ~ 2.0 MHz (K type)/ 1.81 ~ 2.0 MHz (E type)  
3.5 ~ 4.0 MHz (K type)/ 3.5 ~ 3.8 MHz (E type)  
5.1675 MHz (K type)  
5.25 ~ 5.45 MHz  
(E type: Refer to applicable Amateur Radio regulations to  
your country.)  
60 m band  
40 m band  
7.0 ~ 7.3 MHz (K type)/ 7.0 ~ 7.2 MHz (E type)  
30 m band  
20 m band  
17 m band  
15 m band  
12 m band  
10 m band  
6 m band  
10.1 ~ 10.15 MHz  
Frequency range  
14.0 ~ 14.35 MHz  
18.068 ~ 18.168 MHz  
21.0 ~ 21.45 MHz  
24.89 ~ 24.99 MHz  
28.0 ~ 29.7 MHz  
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz (K type) / 50.0 ~ 52.0 MHz (E type)  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
100 W  
SSB/ CW/  
FSK/ FM  
5 W  
Output power  
25 W  
AM  
5 W  
Wide  
Narrow  
SSB  
AM  
5 kHz or less  
Maximum frequency  
deviation (FM)  
2.5 kHz or less  
Balanced  
Modulation  
Low power  
FM  
Reactance  
160 m ~ 10 m band  
6 m band  
–50 dB or less  
Spurious emissions  
–60 dB or less (K type)/ –63 dB or less (E type)  
50 dB or more  
Carrier suppression (SSB)  
Unwanted sideband suppression  
50 dB or more  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS 17  
Transmitter  
Transmit frequency response  
XIT shift frequency range  
Microphone impedance  
Within –6 dB (400 ~ 2600 Hz)  
9.999 kHz  
600   
Receiver  
RX1 (In 160 m/ 80 m/ 40 m/  
20 m/ 15 m Amateur bands,  
IF band width 2.7 kHz or less  
(SSB, CW, FSK))  
RX2 (Other)  
Circuit type  
Double conversion  
superheterodyne  
Triple conversion  
superheterodyne  
0.13 ~ 30 MHz, 50 ~ 54 MHz  
VFO: Continuous 30 kHz ~ 60 MHz  
Frequency range  
1st IF  
11.374 MHz  
24 kHz  
73.095 MHz  
Intermediate  
frequency  
2nd IF  
3rd IF  
10.695 MHz  
24 kHz (except FM)/ 455 kHz  
(FM)  
−
0.5 µV (0.13 ~ 0.522 MHz)  
4 µV (0.522 ~ 1.705 MHz)  
0.2 µV (1.705 ~ 24.5 MHz)  
0.13 µV (24.5 ~ 30.0 MHz)  
0.13 µV (50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz)  
SSB/ CW/ FSK  
(S/N 10 dB)  
Sensitivity  
(Typcal)  
6.3 µV (0.13 ~ 0.522 MHz)  
31.6 µV (0.522 ~ 1.705 MHz)  
2 µV (1.705 ~ 24.5 MHz)  
1.3 µV (24.5 ~ 30.0 MHz)  
1.3 µV (50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz)  
AM (S/N 10 dB)  
0.22 µV (28.0 ~ 30.0 MHz)  
0.22 µV (50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz)  
FM (12 dB SINAD)  
SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM  
FM  
5.6 µV or less (0.13 ~ 0.522 MHz)  
18.0 µV or less (0.522 ~ 1.705 MHz)  
1.8 µV or less (1.705 ~ 30 MHz)  
1.1 µV or less (50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz)  
Squelch sensitivity  
0.2 µV or less (28.0 ~ 30.0 MHz)  
0.2 µV or less (50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz)  
SSB  
2.2 kHz or more (–6 dB), 4.4 kHz or less (–60 dB)  
500 Hz or more (–6 dB), 1.2 kHz or less (–60 dB)  
6.0 kHz or more (–6 dB), 12.0 kHz or less (–50 dB)  
CW/ FSK  
AM  
Selectivity  
FM  
12.0 kHz or more (–6 dB), 25.0 kHz or less (–50 dB)  
Image Ratio  
IF Rejection  
Auto  
70 dB or more  
70 dB or more  
60 dB or more  
70 dB or more  
40 dB or more  
1.5 W (8 )  
Spurious response  
Notch filter  
attenuation  
Manual  
Beat cancel attenuation (at 1 kHz)  
Audio output  
Audio output impedance (EXT.SP)  
RIT shift frequency range  
4 ~ 8   
9.999 kHz  
Specifications are subject to change without notice due to advancements in technology.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2014 JVC KENWOOD Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Jura Capresso Coffeemaker 13623 User Manual
JVC DVD Player XV N3SL User Manual
Kambrook Clock Radio KCR125 User Manual
Kathrein Satellite TV System UFD 570 S User Manual
Kawai Music Mixer MX 8BR User Manual
Kenmore Microwave Oven 72188512 User Manual
Keys Fitness Bicycle 52U User Manual
Kirby Air Conditioner 5 User Manual
Kompernass CD Player KH 7000 User Manual
Kompernass Fan KH1520 User Manual